The Evaluating Self

42उपनिषद् · The Upanishads

Eknath Easwaran, translator, The Upanishads, Nilgiri Press, second edition 2007

Eleven texts, one question: what is doing the looking Isha renounce and enjoy in one sentence Katha the chariot: who owns the journey and who steers Brihadaranyaka by what should one know the knower Chandogya nine illustrations of one identity: you are that Shvetashvatara no cause inside the series can account for it Mundaka two knowledges, and the Vedas are the lower Mandukya, Kena the four states, and who is asking Prashna, Taittiriya, Aitareya energy, the five selves, and consciousness as the ground
Figure 42.0 — The eleven principal Upanishads in the order they are read here, and the one thing each contributes. The rows in rust are the four short enough to be given entire.

The Upanishads are not a book. They are a heap of teaching sessions, set down by nobody who signed his name, attached to the ends of the four Vedas and preserved by families who recited them for centuries before anyone wrote them down. About two hundred texts carry the name; one list fixes the number at a hundred and eight; ten have been treated as principal since the eighth century, when Shankara wrote commentaries on them and by doing so made a canon out of an inheritance. Easwaran's edition gives those ten, adds the Shvetashvatara, which is no less treasured and may once have had a commentary of Shankara's that has not survived, and appends four short later texts. What holds the collection together is not a doctrine but a habit of attention. The rest of the Vedas look outward at fire, wind, dawn and rain; the Upanishads turn the instrument around and ask what is doing the looking. Easwaran calls the result a science, and means the word strictly: a discipline with a method, a laboratory and a repeatable result, where the mind is at once the instrument and the specimen. What follows takes the eleven principal texts in the order Easwaran prints them, with the introductions Michael Nagler wrote for each. Four are short enough to be given entire. The Isha is eighteen verses and states the problem; the Katha is a boy's interview with Death and supplies the working model of a person; the Mandukya is twelve sentences and maps consciousness; the Kena asks who is asking. The other seven are long, and what is given from them is the verses their arguments turn on, which for the Brihadaranyaka and the Chandogya is still a good many. The renderings here are made from the Sanskrit and are meant to be plain; Easwaran's own verse translation is the one to read with them.

The supreme science

Easwaran opens with his own case. In middle life, a professor of English literature at an Indian university under British rule, he found that literature, music, friends and teaching had stopped satisfying him, and went to the library to find out what human beings had learned about life and death. A colleague in psychology noticed that a man from the English department had been checking out every significant book in his field and demanded an explanation. Nothing Easwaran read answered the hunger. Then he came across a copy of the Upanishads, expecting no more from four-thousand-year-old texts than from Alice in Wonderland, and read a passage comparing the joy of a young, healthy, cultured man who has everything the earth can offer with a joy a hundred times greater. He was reading his own life. What arrested him was not argument but the confidence of the voice.

The historical setting he gives is the standard one. Indo-European speakers calling themselves arya entered the subcontinent through the Hindu Kush from about 2000 BC and met a civilization in the Indus valley already a thousand years old. The hymns they brought, from perhaps 1500 BC, worship the forces of life — Agni the fire, Indra the storm, Vayu the wind, Usha the dawn, Yama the first being to die — and worship them without fear. Even in the oldest layer one Being is being addressed under many aspects: truth is one, the Rig Veda says, and the wise call it by many names. Priests performed the rites for the warriors and rulers, and wrote commentaries to explain rites already too old to be understood. Hymns and commentaries together are the Vedas, from vid, to know. Each of the four collections has a first and larger part concerned with ritual action, karma kanda, and a second concerned with wisdom, jnana kanda. The Upanishads are the second part, and because they come at the end of the collections and were learned last, they are called vedanta, the end of the Vedas.

The word itself suggests sitting down near: at the feet of a teacher, in a session of instruction, usually in a forest settlement on the upper Ganges where a household of students lived with a teacher for what tradition set at twelve years. Easwaran insists on the difference from Plato. These are not dialogues in which a position is argued; they are darshana, something seen, and the student was expected to realize what he heard rather than agree with it. The settings are dramatic and various: a wife asks her husband about immortality, a king asks a sage for instruction, a boy is taught by Death, another by fire and beasts and birds. Some of the teachers are women. Ritual, the basis of the religion the texts are attached to, is almost ignored in them, and the word brahman in the sense they give it — the single power that pervades creation and exceeds it — does not appear in the hymn portion of the Rig Veda at all. Easwaran takes this seriously enough to suggest the Upanishads may not be a late flowering of Vedic thought but an independent tributary; a seated figure excavated in the Indus valley would be identified by a villager today without hesitation as Shiva, lord of yoga, in meditation.

The collection, by Veda Rig Sama White Yajur Black Yajur Atharva Aitareya Chandogya Kena Brihadaranyaka Isha Taittiriya Katha Shvetashvatara Mundaka Prashna Mandukya evolution driven by desire sacred sound; the heart’s city longest; a parting dialogue five sheaths; a named God two knowings; the syllable Rust: the four given whole in the pages that follow. Stone: the one of the eleven principal texts Shankara left without a surviving commentary.
Figure 42.1 — The collection and the four read whole here. Each principal Upanishad belongs to one of the four Vedas; the vertical band marks the ten Shankara commented on.

What the forest schools did that has no parallel elsewhere, on Easwaran's account, is to apply the assumption that a law of nature holds uniformly to the medium of knowing itself. The sages observed dreaming and dreamless sleep and asked what is known in each, and what could be called the knower. They looked for invariants: in a flow of experience that never stops changing, is there anything that stays the same. And they did not stop at debating it, because they found that as concentration deepens the mind actually passes through the states under discussion, so that the strata can be separated and watched as a botanist watches a flower. The study was called brahmavidya, which means both the supreme science and the science of the Supreme, and its method was nididhyasana, meditation — not reflection, not discursive thought, not intuition, but concentration so complete that the senses close and the outside world is forgotten while inner wakefulness increases. Easwaran quotes William James on the faculty of voluntarily bringing back a wandering attention, which James called the root of judgment, character and will, and notes that James taught himself the skill well enough to lift himself out of a life-threatening depression. James's phrase for an education built on that faculty, education par excellence, is close to a literal translation of brahmavidya.

The report the sages bring back is set out in stages. Dreaming and waking are made of the same stuff: a man dreaming that he is being chased by an elephant has the heart rate and the stress hormones of a man actually chased. Waking from a dream is therefore not a passage from unreality to reality but from a lower grade of reality to a higher one, which leaves open the question whether there is a grade above waking. In dreamless sleep the observer detaches not only from the body but from the mind — as a tethered bird, the Brihadaranyaka says, tires of flying about and settles on its perch. Easwaran's claim is that one can wake up in that state, and that this is what the Upanishads call turiya, the fourth. In meditation, as concentration deepens, physical identification dissolves first; then awareness withdraws from the senses, emotions, intellect and will, and the sages found that these have no life of their own, that the mind is not conscious but is an instrument of consciousness. What is left when even the sense of "I" goes is what the Upanishads call Brahman, from the root brih, to expand: the ground of existence. The same withdrawal discovers that this ground is also the core of one's own personality, called Atman, the Self, and that the two are the same thing. That equation is what the collection is for. Its most famous statement is tat tvam asi, you are That, and Easwaran is careful about the pronoun: "you" is not the finite personality but, in his words, the consciousness "which makes the eye see and the mind think".

The person as strata, and where attention is withdrawn what is withdrawn from what is awake there the body breath, vitality mind and senses discernment, will joy waking senses turned outward dreaming same stuff, made from memory dreamless sleep the mind settles like a tired bird the fourth: waking up here
Figure 42.2 — Easwaran's picture of the person, drawn from the Taittiriya's five sheaths and the three states. The states are not only conditions one falls into but strata lying at different depths, and the fourth is not a fourth condition but what the other three are made of.

He is equally careful about what the state is not. It is not emptiness but purnata, fullness: in it reality is condensed into pure potential the way all the matter of the universe was condensed before the Big Bang, and physicists, asked what came before, answer that the question does not apply. The triad sat-chit-ananda names it — absolute reality, pure awareness, unconditioned joy — and the practical claim that follows is an economic one. Finite things cannot satisfy an infinite hunger; every human activity is an attempt to fill the same void from outside. Nagler draws the same conclusion in political terms in his introduction to the Isha: materialism enforces a paradigm of scarcity, spiritual economics begins from the infinitude of consciousness, and there is no shortage of love, respect or meaning. Neither of them claims that the world is unreal. The illusion, Easwaran says repeatedly, is only that we appear separate.

Isha: the inner ruler

The Isha stands first in most Indian collections, and Gandhi said that if every scripture were burned and only its first verse remained in memory, Hinduism would live. Asked by a journalist for the secret of his life in three words, he gave two from that verse: renounce and enjoy. It is the only Upanishad that has come down as part of a Samhita rather than attached to one, which is why it is entirely in verse and is still recited in the Vedic manner. Its name is taken from its first word and is unusually personal for the collection; Nagler notes that isha is cognate with German eigen, one's own, and glosses it as the inner ruler.

ईशा वास्यमिदं सर्वं यत्किञ्च जगत्यां जगत् ।
तेन त्यक्तेन भुञ्जीथा मा गृधः कस्यस्विद्धनम् ॥ १ ॥
कुर्वन्नेवेह कर्माणि जिजीविषेच्छतं समाः ।
एवं त्वयि नान्यथेतोऽस्ति न कर्म लिप्यते नरे ॥ २ ॥
īśā vāsyamidaṃ sarvaṃ yatkiñca jagatyāṃ jagat
tena tyaktena bhuñjīthā mā gṛdhaḥ kasyasviddhanam
2
kurvanneveha karmāṇi jijīviṣecchataṃ samāḥ
evaṃ tvayi nānyatheto'sti na karma lipyate nare

1All this, whatever moves in this moving world, is to be covered by the Lord. By that which is given up, enjoy; do not covet the wealth of anyone. Doing works here, one should want to live a hundred years. So it stands for you and not otherwise: action does not cling to a man.

The first word is isha, the lord, and the second, vasyam, is a verbal form of a root with five homonyms, so that it can mean to be pervaded, to be dwelt in, to be clothed, or to be hidden — Max Müller took the last. The opening phrase for "all this" is jagatyam jagat, all that moves in what is ceaselessly moving, which is what samsara also means. The pair of demands in the first two verses is the whole text in miniature and the reason Gandhi valued it: possession is denied and enjoyment commanded in one sentence, and then a full working life, a hundred years of it, is prescribed on the ground that action performed this way leaves no residue.

The Isha refuses both halves of three pairs verse take only this or only this and the instruction is 1 9 to 11 12 to 14 own it go without it give it up, then enjoy it ignorance knowledge cross death by one, then reach the deathless non-becoming becoming know both together or neither serves In each pair the second term is named the darker trap: the inner world is harder to see past than the outer. Verses 9 to 14 are the passage scholars call the crux; the terms are unstable, the shape of the rule is not.
Figure 42.3 — The Isha's method. Each pair sets a lower and a higher term, refuses to let either stand alone, and makes the higher the harder to get past.
असुर्या नाम ते लोका अन्धेन तमसाऽऽवृताः ।
तांस्ते प्रेत्याभिगच्छन्ति ये के चात्महनो जनाः ॥ ३ ॥
अनेजदेकं मनसो जवीयो नैनद्देवा आप्नुवन्पूर्वमर्षत् ।
तद्धावतोऽन्यानत्येति तिष्ठत्तस्मिन्नपो मातरिश्वा दधाति ॥ ४ ॥
तदेजति तन्नैजति तद्दूरे तद्वन्तिके ।
तदन्तरस्य सर्वस्य तदु सर्वस्यास्य बाह्यतः ॥ ५ ॥
asuryā nāma te lokā andhena tamasā''vṛtāḥ
tāṃste pretyābhigacchanti ye ke cātmahano janāḥ
4
anejadekaṃ manaso javīyo nainaddevā āpnuvanpūrvamarṣat
taddhāvato'nyānatyeti tiṣṭhattasminnapo mātariśvā dadhāti
5
tadejati tannaijati taddūre tadvantike
tadantarasya sarvasya tadu sarvasyāsya bāhyataḥ

3Sunless are those worlds, wrapped in blind darkness. To them, after death, go the people who kill the Self. Unmoving, one, swifter than the mind; the gods did not reach it, for it went before them. Standing, it outruns others who run. In it Matarishvan sets the waters. It moves and it does not move. It is far and it is near. It is inside all this, and it is outside all this.

Verse 3 is the only threat in the text and the word it turns on is atmahan, killers of the Self, which the commentators take to mean not suicides but people who live as though there were nothing in them to kill. The worlds they go to are called asurya, sunless, and the darkness is described twice over, as blind and as a covering.

Every statement, and its opposite in the same breath said of it and also said of it what the pair does unmoving, one swifter than the mind no single predicate is left standing alone it moves it does not move sitting, it outruns those who run far away near at hand distance does not apply to it inside all this outside all this nor does being in a place The gods did not reach it: it went before them, and is never the thing in front. Verse 5 makes the contradiction a method rather than a puzzle to be resolved.
Figure 42.4 — Verses 4 and 5. Each thing said of the Self is said with its opposite in the same line, so that no single predicate is left holding.
यस्तु सर्वाणि भूतान्यात्मन्येवानुपश्यति ।
सर्वभूतेषु चात्मानं ततो न विजुगुप्सते ॥ ६ ॥
यस्मिन्सर्वाणि भूतान्यात्मैवाभूद्विजानतः ।
तत्र को मोहः कः शोक एकत्वमनुपश्यतः ॥ ७ ॥
स पर्यगाच्छुक्रमकायमव्रणमस्नाविरं शुद्धमपापविद्धम् ।
कविर्मनीषी परिभूः स्वयम्भूर्याथातथ्यतोऽर्थान् व्यदधाच्छाश्वतीभ्यः समाभ्यः ॥ ८ ॥
yastu sarvāṇi bhūtānyātmanyevānupaśyati
sarvabhūteṣu cātmānaṃ tato na vijugupsate
7
yasminsarvāṇi bhūtānyātmaivābhūdvijānataḥ
tatra ko mohaḥ kaḥ śoka ekatvamanupaśyataḥ
8
sa paryagācchukramakāyamavraṇamasnāviraṃ śuddhamapāpaviddham
kavirmanīṣī paribhūḥ svayambhūryāthātathyato'rthān vyadadhācchāśvatībhyaḥ samābhyaḥ

6One who sees all beings in the Self alone, and the Self in all beings, shrinks from nothing after that. When, for one who knows, all beings have become the Self, what bewilderment and what grief can there be for one who sees oneness? It has reached everywhere: bright, bodiless, unscarred, without sinews, clean, untouched by evil. Seer, thinker, encompassing, self-existent, it has set out the things as they are for the everlasting years.

Verse 4 uses the contradiction deliberately, and verse 5 makes it a method: whatever is said of the Self, the opposite has to be said in the same breath. Matarishvan in verse 4 is a barely known figure, something like Prometheus, distributing the offices and functions of life; the same motif of a first apportionment comes back in verse 8. The verb in verse 6 that Easwaran renders as knowing no fear is vijugupsate, a strong word carrying revulsion: the one who sees this way shrinks from nothing and is disgusted by no part of creation. Augustine, Nagler notes, says the same in the Confessions — there is no sanity in those who dislike any part of what was made.

The one who shrinks from nothing what is seen taken together what cannot then arise all beings in the Self one seeing, not two no revulsion at any part of it the Self in all beings no bewilderment, and no grief The verb is vijugupsate, to be disgusted: what goes is the recoil from part of creation. Grief is not borne better; the verse says it has nowhere left to stand.
Figure 42.5 — Verses 6 and 7. Two seeings taken together, and the three things the text says can then no longer arise.
अन्धं तमः प्रविशन्ति येऽविद्यामुपासते ।
ततो भूय इव ते तमो य उ विद्यायां रताः ॥ ९ ॥
अन्यदेवाहुर्विद्ययाऽन्यदाहुरविद्यया ।
इति शुश्रुम धीराणां ये नस्तद्विचचक्षिरे ॥ १० ॥
विद्यां चाविद्यां च यस्तद्वेदोभयं सह ।
अविद्यया मृत्युं तीर्त्वा विद्ययाऽमृतमश्नुते ॥ ११ ॥
andhaṃ tamaḥ praviśanti ye'vidyāmupāsate
tato bhūya iva te tamo ya u vidyāyāṃ ratāḥ
10
anyadevāhurvidyayā'nyadāhuravidyayā
iti śuśruma dhīrāṇāṃ ye nastadvicacakṣire
11
vidyāṃ cāvidyāṃ ca yastadvedobhayaṃ saha
avidyayā mṛtyuṃ tīrtvā vidyayā'mṛtamaśnute

9Into blind darkness enter those who follow ignorance; into darkness greater than that, as it were, those who delight in knowledge. One thing, they say, comes of knowledge; another thing, they say, comes of ignorance. So we have heard from the wise who explained it to us. One who knows both knowledge and ignorance together crosses death by ignorance and reaches the deathless by knowledge.

The pattern of the four verses is fixed and worth watching before the argument about them begins. Two terms are named; both are condemned when taken alone, and the second is condemned more heavily; then the two are prescribed together, with one of them used to cross death and the other to reach what does not die. The same four lines are then repeated with a new pair of terms.

अन्धं तमः प्रविशन्ति येऽसम्भूतिमुपासते ।
ततो भूय इव ते तमो य उ सम्भूत्यां रताः ॥ १२ ॥
अन्यदेवाहुः सम्भवादन्यदाहुरसम्भवात् ।
इति शुश्रुम धीराणां ये नस्तद्विचचक्षिरे ॥ १३ ॥
सम्भूतिं च विनाशं च यस्तद्वेदोभयं सह ।
विनाशेन मृत्युं तीर्त्वा सम्भूत्याऽमृतमश्नुते ॥ १४ ॥
andhaṃ tamaḥ praviśanti ye'sambhūtimupāsate
tato bhūya iva te tamo ya u sambhūtyāṃ ratāḥ
13
anyadevāhuḥ sambhavādanyadāhurasambhavāt
iti śuśruma dhīrāṇāṃ ye nastadvicacakṣire
14
sambhūtiṃ ca vināśaṃ ca yastadvedobhayaṃ saha
vināśena mṛtyuṃ tīrtvā sambhūtyā'mṛtamaśnute

12Into blind darkness enter those who follow non-becoming; into darkness greater than that, as it were, those who delight in becoming. One thing, they say, comes of becoming; another thing, they say, comes of non-becoming. So we have heard from the wise who explained it to us. One who knows both becoming and destruction together crosses death by destruction and reaches the deathless by becoming.

Verses 9 to 14 are what scholars call a crux, and the difficulty is not textual but doctrinal. The structure is plain — two terms, both condemned when taken alone, both prescribed when taken together — but the terms are unstable. Vidya and avidya are knowledge and ignorance; sambhuti and asambhuti are becoming and its absence, the manifest and the unmanifest; and the sentence that pairs them says that the way through death runs by the lower term and the way to the deathless by the higher. Easwaran reads the first pair as the outer world and the inner, and the second as the immanent and the transcendent, and takes the passage as a rule against half-measures in either direction. Nagler draws attention to the harder half of the lesson: in each pair it is the higher term that the text says is the darker trap. Being hypnotized by one's own sensations and forgetting the world is worse than materialism, and the point lands, he says, on solipsistic escapes such as drugs, where the private reality manufactured is falser than the multiplicity outside.

हिरण्मयेन पात्रेण सत्यस्यापिहितं मुखम् ।
तत्त्वं पूषन्नपावृणु सत्यधर्माय दृष्टये ॥ १५ ॥
पूषन्नेकर्षे यम सूर्य प्राजापत्य
व्यूह रश्मीन् समूह तेजः ।
यत्ते रूपं कल्याणतमं तत्ते पश्यामि
योऽसावसौ पुरुषः सोऽहमस्मि ॥ १६ ॥
वायुरनिलममृतमथेदं भस्मान्तं शरीरम् ।
क्रतो स्मर कृतं स्मर क्रतो स्मर कृतं स्मर ॥ १७ ॥
अग्ने नय सुपथा राये अस्मान्
विश्वानि देव वयुनानि विद्वान् ।
युयोध्यस्मज्जुहुराणमेनो
भूयिष्ठां ते नमौक्तिं विधेम ॥ १८ ॥
hiraṇmayena pātreṇa satyasyāpihitaṃ mukham
tattvaṃ pūṣannapāvṛṇu satyadharmāya dṛṣṭaye
16
pūṣannekarṣe yama sūrya prājāpatya
vyūha raśmīn samūha tejaḥ
yatte rūpaṃ kalyāṇatamaṃ tatte paśyāmi
yo'sāvasau puruṣaḥ so'hamasmi
17
vāyuranilamamṛtamathedaṃ bhasmāntaṃ śarīram
krato smara kṛtaṃ smara krato smara kṛtaṃ smara
18
agne naya supathā rāye asmān
viśvāni deva vayunāni vidvān
yuyodhyasmajjuhurāṇameno
bhūyiṣṭhāṃ te namauktiṃ vidhema

15The face of truth is covered over by a golden vessel. Uncover it, Pushan, for one whose law is truth, that he may see. Pushan, sole seer, controller, sun, child of Prajapati, spread out your rays and draw in your blaze. I see that form of yours which is the most kindly. That person there: I am he. Let this breath go to the immortal wind, and let this body end in ashes. OM. Purpose, remember what was done; purpose, remember what was done. Agni, lead us by the good road to what is ours, you who know all our ways. Turn from us the crooked wrong. We would make you the fullest speech of praise.

The last four verses change register completely. They are addressed to the sun, to the wind and to fire, in the vocabulary of the hymns the Upanishads elsewhere leave behind, and they are said at a cremation. The golden disc of the sun is the cover that hides the face of truth, the same disc whose brightness must be dimmed before the form behind it can be looked at. The final line of verse 16, so'ham asmi, that am I, is one of the four great formulae; the Sanskrit carries a pun that the English cannot, since the demonstrative used for the person in the sun is also the one used for the person in the heart. Verse 17 asks the mind to remember what it has done, at the moment when there is nothing else left to do, and the text that opened by refusing possession closes by asking a fire god for the good road.

What is asked of each, at the fire who is addressed what is asked why Pushan, the sun draw in your blaze a golden vessel covers the face of truth the wind take this breath and let the body end in ashes Agni, the fire lead by the good road you know all our ways; turn the wrong aside the mind remember what was done there is nothing else left to do The disc that lets the sun be seen is the same disc that hides what stands behind it. The text that opened by refusing possession closes by asking a fire god for the road.
Figure 42.6 — Verses 15 to 18, said at a cremation. Four addressees, one request each, and the golden vessel that has to be moved before anything is seen.

Katha: death as teacher

The Katha belongs to the Black Yajur Veda, whose home was the midland region around what is now Agra and Delhi. Of the sage Katha after whom it is named, tradition records only that he founded the school and studied under Vaishampayana. On the evidence of metre, language and the style of its thinking it is among the earliest of the verse Upanishads, and it shares whole verses with the Bhagavad Gita and whole sections with the later Maitri. Its six chapters are called vallis; editions that group them into two parts of three number the chariot verses I.3.3 to I.3.9, which counted straight through the vallis are 3.3 to 3.9. That is the numbering used here, and the same rule of counting the sections straight through is applied to the other texts below wherever their divisions run three deep.

The story is older than the Upanishad and smaller. A brief myth in the Taittiriya Brahmana tells of a boy called Nachiketa to whom Yama reveals a sacrifice that is then named after him, and in that version the boy's third request is for the secret of punar mrityu, redeath: the ability to come back each time one dies. The Upanishad takes that request and enlarges it into the question of whether there is anything that does not die at all.

उशन् ह वै वाजश्रवसः सर्ववेदसं ददौ ।
तस्य ह नचिकेता नाम पुत्र आस ॥ १ ॥
तं ह कुमारं सन्तं दक्षिणासु
नीयमानासु श्रद्धाविवेश सोऽमन्यत ॥ २ ॥
पीतोदका जग्धतृणा दुग्धदोहा निरिन्द्रियाः ।
अनन्दा नाम ते लोकास्तान् स गच्छति ता ददत् ॥ ३ ॥
uśan ha vai vājaśravasaḥ sarvavedasaṃ dadau
tasya ha naciketā nāma putra āsa
1.2
taṃ ha kumāraṃ santaṃ dakṣiṇāsu
nīyamānāsu śraddhāviveśa so'manyata
1.3
pītodakā jagdhatṛṇā dugdhadohā nirindriyāḥ
anandā nāma te lokāstān sa gacchati tā dadat

1.1Wanting the reward, Vajashravasa gave away everything he had. He had a son by the name of Nachiketa. While the gifts were being led away, faith entered the boy, and he thought: Their water drunk, their grass eaten, their milk drawn off, their strength gone — joyless are the worlds that man goes to who gives such cattle.

What Nachiketa objects to is a sacrifice in which the cows given away have stopped giving milk. He is not a rebel; his complaint is that his father is not taking his own religion seriously. The word the text gives for what enters him is shraddha, which Nagler translates as determined seriousness rather than belief, and which is the only trait the boy is ever assigned.

What the boy saw in his father's gift the cow as given what it can still do and so its water drunk nothing to drink the gift costs the giver nothing its grass eaten nothing to graze and buys what it is worth its milk drawn off nothing to give joyless are the worlds that man goes to Nachiketa is not refusing the rite; he is saying his father is not taking it seriously. The word for what enters him is shraddha, which Nagler reads as determined seriousness.
Figure 42.7 — Verse 1.3. Each thing the cow no longer has, and what that makes of the gift.
स होवाच पितरं तत कस्मै मां दास्यसीति ।
द्वितीयं तृतीयं तं होवाच मृत्यवे त्वा ददामीति ॥ ४ ॥
बहूनामेमि प्रथमो बहूनामेमि मध्यमः ।
किं स्विद्यमस्य कर्तव्यं यन्मयाऽद्य करिष्यति ॥ ५ ॥
अनुपश्य यथा पूर्वे प्रतिपश्य तथाऽपरे ।
सस्यमिव मर्त्यः पच्यते सस्यमिवाजायते पुनः ॥ ६ ॥
sa hovāca pitaraṃ tata kasmai māṃ dāsyasīti
dvitīyaṃ tṛtīyaṃ taṃ hovāca mṛtyave tvā dadāmīti
1.5
bahūnāmemi prathamo bahūnāmemi madhyamaḥ
kiṃ svidyamasya kartavyaṃ yanmayā'dya kariṣyati
1.6
anupaśya yathā pūrve pratipaśya tathā'pare
sasyamiva martyaḥ pacyate sasyamivājāyate punaḥ

1.4He said to his father: father, to whom will you give me? A second time and a third. Death, said the father: to Death I give you. Of many I go first; of many I go in the middle. What is it that Yama has to do that he will do today through me? Look back at how those before us were; look ahead at how those after will be. Like grain a mortal ripens; like grain he is born again.

Nagler's reading of the consignment is that the boy is given to death by his own father because every parent does exactly that: birth is the beginning of a trajectory to death, and love cannot stop it. Verse 5 is the boy reasoning about his own usefulness to Death, and verse 6 is the answer he reaches before Yama says a word — that the crop is cut and comes up again, and that this is not a consolation.

वैश्वानरः प्रविशत्यतिथिर्ब्राह्मणो गृहान् ।
तस्यैतां शान्तिं कुर्वन्ति हर वैवस्वतोदकम् ॥ ७ ॥
आशाप्रतीक्षे संगतं सूनृतां
चेष्टापूर्ते पुत्रपशूंश्च सर्वान् ।
एतद्वृङ्क्ते पुरुषस्याल्पमेधसो
यस्यानश्नन्वसति ब्राह्मणो गृहे ॥ ८ ॥
तिस्रो रात्रीर्यदवात्सीर्गृहे मेऽनश्नन् ब्रह्मन्नतिथिर्नमस्यः ।
नमस्तेऽस्तु ब्रह्मन् स्वस्ति मेऽस्तु
तस्मात्प्रति त्रीन्वरान्वृणीष्व ॥ ९ ॥
vaiśvānaraḥ praviśatyatithirbrāhmaṇo gṛhān
tasyaitāṃ śāntiṃ kurvanti hara vaivasvatodakam
1.8
āśāpratīkṣe saṃgataṃ sūnṛtāṃ
ceṣṭāpūrte putrapaśūṃśca sarvān
etadvṛṅkte puruṣasyālpamedhaso
yasyānaśnanvasati brāhmaṇo gṛhe
1.9
tisro rātrīryadavātsīrgṛhe me'naśnan brahmannatithirnamasyaḥ
namaste'stu brahman svasti me'stu
tasmātprati trīnvarānvṛṇīṣva

1.7A brahmin guest enters a house as fire itself. Men make this peace for him: fetch water, son of the sun. Hope and expectation, company, kind speech, sacrifices and good works, sons and cattle and all — these it tears from the man of little sense in whose house a brahmin stays without eating. Three nights you have stayed in my house without eating, brahmin, an honoured guest. Homage to you, brahmin, and let it be well with me. Choose three wishes in return.

He waits three nights at Yama's door without eating, a detail that is both hospitality law and a folk-tale rule, since a visitor to the land of the dead who eats its food cannot leave. Yama's apology is exact about what is at stake: an unfed guest consumes the merit of the house. The three nights buy three wishes, one for each.

Three nights, and what they cost the house the guest what an unfed guest takes the settlement a brahmin enters a house as fire hope and expectation, company, kind speech three nights unfed, three wishes in return and waits three nights rites and good works, sons and cattle and all one wish for each night A visitor to the land of the dead who eats its food cannot leave, and the boy eats nothing. Yama's apology is exact about the debt: an unfed guest consumes the merit of the house.
Figure 42.8 — Verses 1.7 to 1.9. What an unfed guest takes from a house, and the settlement Yama offers for it.
शान्तसंकल्पः सुमना यथा स्याद्
वीतमन्युर्गौतमो माऽभि मृत्यो ।
त्वत्प्रसृष्टं माऽभिवदेत्प्रतीत
एतत् त्रयाणां प्रथमं वरं वृणे ॥ १० ॥
यथा पुरस्ताद् भविता प्रतीत
औद्दालकिरारुणिर्मत्प्रसृष्टः ।
सुखं रात्रीः शयिता वीतमन्युः
त्वां ददृशिवान्मृत्युमुखात् प्रमुक्तम् ॥ ११ ॥
śāntasaṃkalpaḥ sumanā yathā syād
vītamanyurgautamo mā'bhi mṛtyo
tvatprasṛṣṭaṃ mā'bhivadetpratīta
etat trayāṇāṃ prathamaṃ varaṃ vṛṇe
1.11
yathā purastād bhavitā pratīta
auddālakirāruṇirmatprasṛṣṭaḥ
sukhaṃ rātrīḥ śayitā vītamanyuḥ
tvāṃ dadṛśivānmṛtyumukhāt pramuktam

1.10That Gautama may be calm in purpose, kind, and free of anger towards me, Death; that he may greet me, released by you, and know me — this of the three I choose as the first. As before he will greet you, Auddalaki Aruni, released by me; he will sleep at night with his anger gone, seeing you freed from the mouth of death.

The first wish is domestic. The boy asks that his father's anger be gone and that he be recognized and received when he comes back, and the two things he asks for, recognition and the end of anger, are the two things a returning child would want. Yama grants it without comment.

स्वर्गे लोके न भयं किंचनास्ति
न तत्र त्वं न जरया बिभेति ।
उभे तीर्त्वाऽशनायापिपासे
शोकातिगो मोदते स्वर्गलोके ॥ १२ ॥
स त्वमग्निं स्वर्ग्यमध्येषि मृत्यो
प्रब्रूहि त्वं श्रद्दधानाय मह्यम् ।
स्वर्गलोका अमृतत्वं भजन्त
एतद् द्वितीयेन वृणे वरेण ॥ १३ ॥
प्र ते ब्रवीमि तदु मे निबोध
स्वर्ग्यमग्निं नचिकेतः प्रजानन् ।
अनन्तलोकाप्तिमथो प्रतिष्ठां
विद्धि त्वमेतं निहितं गुहायाम् ॥ १४ ॥
svarge loke na bhayaṃ kiṃcanāsti
na tatra tvaṃ na jarayā bibheti
ubhe tīrtvā'śanāyāpipāse
śokātigo modate svargaloke
1.13
sa tvamagniṃ svargyamadhyeṣi mṛtyo
prabrūhi tvaṃ śraddadhānāya mahyam
svargalokā amṛtatvaṃ bhajanta
etad dvitīyena vṛṇe vareṇa
1.14
pra te bravīmi tadu me nibodha
svargyamagniṃ naciketaḥ prajānan
anantalokāptimatho pratiṣṭhāṃ
viddhi tvametaṃ nihitaṃ guhāyām

1.12In the world of heaven there is no fear at all; you are not there, and one does not fear old age. Crossing both hunger and thirst, past sorrow, one is glad in the world of heaven. You know the fire that leads to heaven, Death; tell it to me, for I have faith. Those in the world of heaven share in the deathless. This I choose with my second wish. I will tell it to you; learn it from me. Know the fire that leads to heaven, Nachiketa: the winning of endless worlds, and their support, set down in the hidden place.

Three nights at the door, three things asked for my father's anger gone first night the fire that leads to heaven second night does a dead man exist third night granted at once the boy's first thought is his father granted, and named after the boy the older myth ends here refused, then bought against sons, cattle, gold, land, a kingdom, long life Every offer is to be enjoyed in the world of heaven, which in this scheme is a place one leaves again.
Figure 42.9 — Nachiketa's three requests and what each is worth. The first two are granted at once; the third is the one Death tries to buy back.
लोकादिमग्निं तमुवाच तस्मै
या इष्टका यावतीर्वा यथा वा ।
स चापि तत्प्रत्यवदद्यथोक्तं
अथास्य मृत्युः पुनरेवाह तुष्टः ॥ १५ ॥
तमब्रवीत् प्रीयमाणो महात्मा
वरं तवेहाद्य ददामि भूयः ।
तवैव नाम्ना भविताऽयमग्निः
सृङ्कां चेमामनेकरूपां गृहाण ॥ १६ ॥
त्रिणाचिकेतस्त्रिभिरेत्य सन्धिं
त्रिकर्मकृत्तरति जन्ममृत्यू ।
ब्रह्मजज्ञं देवमीड्यं विदित्वा
निचाय्येमां शान्तिमत्यन्तमेति ॥ १७ ॥
त्रिणाचिकेतस्त्रयमेतद्विदित्वा
य एवं विद्वांश्चिनुते नाचिकेतम् ।
स मृत्युपाशान् पुरतः प्रणोद्य
शोकातिगो मोदते स्वर्गलोके ॥ १८ ॥
lokādimagniṃ tamuvāca tasmai
yā iṣṭakā yāvatīrvā yathā vā
sa cāpi tatpratyavadadyathoktaṃ
athāsya mṛtyuḥ punarevāha tuṣṭaḥ
1.16
tamabravīt prīyamāṇo mahātmā
varaṃ tavehādya dadāmi bhūyaḥ
tavaiva nāmnā bhavitā'yamagniḥ
sṛṅkāṃ cemāmanekarūpāṃ gṛhāṇa
1.17
triṇāciketastribhiretya sandhiṃ
trikarmakṛttarati janmamṛtyū
brahmajajñaṃ devamīḍyaṃ viditvā
nicāyyemāṃ śāntimatyantameti
1.18
triṇāciketastrayametadviditvā
ya evaṃ vidvāṃścinute nāciketam
sa mṛtyupāśān purataḥ praṇodya
śokātigo modate svargaloke

1.15He told him that fire, the beginning of the worlds, what the bricks are and how many and how laid. And the boy said it back as it had been said, and Death, pleased, spoke again. Delighted, the great one said to him: I give you here today a further gift. This fire shall go by your name; and take this chain of many shapes. Whoever lays the triple Nachiketa fire, joins with the three and does the three works, crosses over birth and death. Knowing the god born of Brahman, the adorable, and seeing him, he comes to peace without end. Whoever knows the three and, so knowing, piles the Nachiketa fire, throws off the snares of death before him and is glad in the world of heaven, past sorrow.

The second wish is for a ritual, and Yama teaches it, names it after the boy and adds a gift of his own. The three of verse 17 are the three meetings named in tradition as father, mother and teacher, and the three works are sacrifice, study and giving. What the fire buys is heaven, and the text will shortly say what heaven is worth. The boy repeats the instruction back word for word, which is how the schools tested a student, and the repetition is what pleases Yama.

The fire that is laid three times what is counted what it is what it buys the bricks what they are, how many, and how they are laid the winning of endless worlds the three meetings father, mother, teacher and the support of them the three works sacrifice, study, giving crossing over birth and death The boy says the instruction back word for word, which is how the schools tested a pupil. Yama names the fire after him, and the text is about to say what heaven is worth.
Figure 42.10 — Verses 1.14 to 1.18. Three things are counted in the laying of the fire, and the text says what each buys.
एष तेऽग्निर्नचिकेतः स्वर्ग्यो
यमवृणीथा द्वितीयेन वरेण ।
एतमग्निं तवैव प्रवक्ष्यन्ति जनासः
तृतीयं वरं नचिकेतो वृणीष्व ॥ १९ ॥
येयं प्रेते विचिकित्सा मनुष्येऽस्तीत्येके नायमस्तीति चैके ।
एतद्विद्यामनुशिष्टस्त्वयाऽहं
वराणामेष वरस्तृतीयः ॥ २० ॥
देवैरत्रापि विचिकित्सितं पुरा
न हि सुविज्ञेयमणुरेष धर्मः ।
अन्यं वरं नचिकेतो वृणीष्व
मा मोपरोत्सीरति मा सृजैनम् ॥ २१ ॥
देवैरत्रापि विचिकित्सितं किल
त्वं च मृत्यो यन्न सुज्ञेयमात्थ ।
वक्ता चास्य त्वादृगन्यो न लभ्यो
नान्यो वरस्तुल्य एतस्य कश्चित् ॥ २२ ॥
eṣa te'gnirnaciketaḥ svargyo
yamavṛṇīthā dvitīyena vareṇa
etamagniṃ tavaiva pravakṣyanti janāsaḥ
tṛtīyaṃ varaṃ naciketo vṛṇīṣva
1.20
yeyaṃ prete vicikitsā manuṣye'stītyeke nāyamastīti caike
etadvidyāmanuśiṣṭastvayā'haṃ
varāṇāmeṣa varastṛtīyaḥ
1.21
devairatrāpi vicikitsitaṃ purā
na hi suvijñeyamaṇureṣa dharmaḥ
anyaṃ varaṃ naciketo vṛṇīṣva
mā moparotsīrati mā sṛjainam
1.22
devairatrāpi vicikitsitaṃ kila
tvaṃ ca mṛtyo yanna sujñeyamāttha
vaktā cāsya tvādṛganyo na labhyo
nānyo varastulya etasya kaścit

1.19This is your fire that leads to heaven, Nachiketa, which you chose with the second wish. Men will call this fire yours. Choose the third wish, Nachiketa. When a man is dead there is this doubt: he exists, say some; he does not, say others. Let me know this, taught by you. Of my three wishes this is the third. Even the gods were in doubt about this long ago. It is not easy to know; this matter is fine. Choose another wish, Nachiketa. Do not press me; release me from this one. Even the gods were in doubt about it, you say; and you yourself, Death, say it is not easily known. No other teacher of it like you can be found, and no other wish is the equal of this.

Yama says the gods themselves were in doubt about it, that the matter is subtle, and asks to be released from his promise. The boy's counter is a piece of logic: the difficulty of the question is a reason to ask the one person qualified to answer it, not a reason to withdraw. Then Death makes his offer.

शतायुषः पुत्रपौत्रान्वृणीष्वा
बहून्पशून् हस्तिहिरण्यमश्वान् ।
भूमेर्महदायतनं वृणीष्व
स्वयं च जीव शरदो यावदिच्छसि ॥ २३ ॥
एतत्तुल्यं यदि मन्यसे वरं
वृणीष्व वित्तं चिरजीविकां च ।
महाभूमौ नचिकेतस्त्वमेधि
कामानां त्वा कामभाजं करोमि ॥ २४ ॥
ये ये कामा दुर्लभा मर्त्यलोके
सर्वान् कामांश्छन्दतः प्रार्थयस्व ।
इमा रामाः सरथाः सतूर्या
न हीदृशा लम्भनीया मनुष्यैः ।
आभिर्मत्प्रत्ताभिः परिचारयस्व
नचिकेतो मरणं माऽनुप्राक्षीः ॥ २५ ॥
śatāyuṣaḥ putrapautrānvṛṇīṣvā
bahūnpaśūn hastihiraṇyamaśvān
bhūmermahadāyatanaṃ vṛṇīṣva
svayaṃ ca jīva śarado yāvadicchasi
1.24
etattulyaṃ yadi manyase varaṃ
vṛṇīṣva vittaṃ cirajīvikāṃ ca
mahābhūmau naciketastvamedhi
kāmānāṃ tvā kāmabhājaṃ karomi
1.25
ye ye kāmā durlabhā martyaloke
sarvān kāmāṃśchandataḥ prārthayasva
imā rāmāḥ sarathāḥ satūryā
na hīdṛśā lambhanīyā manuṣyaiḥ
ābhirmatprattābhiḥ paricārayasva
naciketo maraṇaṃ mā'nuprākṣīḥ

1.23Choose sons and grandsons who live a hundred years, many cattle, elephants, gold and horses. Choose a great stretch of earth, and live yourself as many autumns as you wish. If you think any wish the equal of this, choose it: wealth and long life. Be great on the wide earth, Nachiketa; I make you the enjoyer of your desires. Whatever desires are hard to get in the world of mortals, ask for them all as you please. Here are women with chariots and music, such as are not to be had by men; be served by these, whom I give you. Do not ask about dying, Nachiketa.

Nagler notes that the offer is a piece of psychology and that Yama gives himself away with a single word: all of it is to be enjoyed svargaloke, in the world of heaven, which in this scheme is not the goal but a cul-de-sac where the results of good acts are consumed and after which one returns. The list also runs in an order — sons, cattle, land, a lifetime of one's own choosing, then pleasure — which is the order in which a man is usually bought.

श्वोभावा मर्त्यस्य यदन्तकैतत्
सर्वेंद्रियाणां जरयन्ति तेजः ।
अपि सर्वं जीवितमल्पमेव
तवैव वाहास्तव नृत्यगीते ॥ २६ ॥
न वित्तेन तर्पणीयो मनुष्यो
लप्स्यामहे वित्तमद्राक्ष्म चेत्त्वा ।
जीविष्यामो यावदीशिष्यसि त्वं
वरस्तु मे वरणीयः स एव ॥ २७ ॥
अजीर्यताममृतानामुपेत्य
जीर्यन्मर्त्यः क्वधःस्थः प्रजानन् ।
अभिध्यायन् वर्णरतिप्रमोदान्
अतिदीर्घे जीविते को रमेत ॥ २८ ॥
यस्मिन्निदं विचिकित्सन्ति मृत्यो
यत्साम्पराये महति ब्रूहि नस्तत् ।
योऽयं वरो गूढमनुप्रविष्टो
नान्यं तस्मान्नचिकेता वृणीते ॥ २९ ॥
śvobhāvā martyasya yadantakaitat
sarveṃdriyāṇāṃ jarayanti tejaḥ
api sarvaṃ jīvitamalpameva
tavaiva vāhāstava nṛtyagīte
1.27
na vittena tarpaṇīyo manuṣyo
lapsyāmahe vittamadrākṣma cettvā
jīviṣyāmo yāvadīśiṣyasi tvaṃ
varastu me varaṇīyaḥ sa eva
1.28
ajīryatāmamṛtānāmupetya
jīryanmartyaḥ kvadhaḥsthaḥ prajānan
abhidhyāyan varṇaratipramodān
atidīrghe jīvite ko rameta
1.29
yasminnidaṃ vicikitsanti mṛtyo
yatsāmparāye mahati brūhi nastat
yo'yaṃ varo gūḍhamanupraviṣṭo
nānyaṃ tasmānnaciketā vṛṇīte

1.26Tomorrow's things, Ender, and they wear out the vigour of all the senses. And the whole of life is short. Keep the horses; keep the dance and the song. A man is not to be filled full by wealth. Shall we get wealth, having seen you? Shall we live as long as you rule? The wish I choose is that one alone. Having come near the undecaying and the deathless, what decaying mortal down here, knowing, delighting in the beauty and pleasure of the long life below — what man would take joy in it? Tell us that about which they are in doubt, Death, what is in the great passing over. This wish, which has entered the hidden place, and no other, Nachiketa chooses.

The refusal has three parts and the middle one is the argument. Whatever Yama can give wears out the faculty that would enjoy it; the goods are shvobhava, things that only last until tomorrow; and a man who has stood in front of Death cannot be paid in a currency Death controls. The last line returns the question in Yama's own words, and the interview becomes a lesson.

अन्यच्छ्रेयोऽन्यदुतैव प्रेयस्ते उभे नानार्थे पुरुषं सिनीतः ।
तयोः श्रेय आददानस्य साधु
भवति हीयतेऽर्थाद्य उ प्रेयो वृणीते ॥ १ ॥
श्रेयश्च प्रेयश्च मनुष्यमेतः
तौ सम्परीत्य विविनक्ति धीरः ।
श्रेयो हि धीरोऽभि प्रेयसो वृणीते
प्रेयो मन्दो योगक्षेमाद्वृणीते ॥ २ ॥
anyacchreyo'nyadutaiva preyaste ubhe nānārthe puruṣaṃ sinītaḥ
tayoḥ śreya ādadānasya sādhu
bhavati hīyate'rthādya u preyo vṛṇīte
2.2
śreyaśca preyaśca manuṣyametaḥ
tau samparītya vivinakti dhīraḥ
śreyo hi dhīro'bhi preyaso vṛṇīte
preyo mando yogakṣemādvṛṇīte

2.1One thing is the good, and another is the pleasant; the two, with different ends, bind a man. It goes well for the one who takes the good; the one who chooses the pleasant falls short of the goal. The good and the pleasant come to a man. The thoughtful one walks round them both and tells them apart. The thoughtful chooses the good over the pleasant; the dull chooses the pleasant, for getting and keeping.

Shreya is what conduces to well-being and preya is what one is fond of, often by conditioning. Nagler's gloss is that the choice is faced at every moment, waking and even sleeping, and that the distinction has to be attended to for exactly as long as the compartments in a personality last.

Both present themselves; one is preferred a man, at any moment both arrive together shreya, the good what conduces to well-being preya, the pleasant what one is fond of, by habit it goes well the thoughtful walk round both first the goal is missed chosen for getting and for keeping The test is not which act is done but which of the two is wanted, so it has to be applied again every moment. Nachiketa passes it by refusing the offer before he is told what the refusal buys.
Figure 42.11 — The Katha's first instruction, verses 2.1 and 2.2. Both goods present themselves; only one is chosen by walking round them, and the test is not what is done but which is preferred.
स त्वं प्रियान्प्रियरूपांश्च कामान्
अभिध्यायन्नचिकेतोऽत्यस्राक्षीः ।
नैतां सृङ्कां वित्तमयीमवाप्तो
यस्यां मज्जन्ति बहवो मनुष्याः ॥ ३ ॥
दूरमेते विपरीते विषूची
अविद्या या च विद्येति ज्ञाता ।
विद्याभीप्सिनं नचिकेतसं मन्ये
न त्वा कामा बहवोऽलोलुपन्त ॥ ४ ॥
अविद्यायामन्तरे वर्तमानाः
स्वयं धीराः पण्डितंमन्यमानाः ।
दन्द्रम्यमाणाः परियन्ति मूढा
अन्धेनैव नीयमाना यथान्धाः ॥ ५ ॥
sa tvaṃ priyānpriyarūpāṃśca kāmān
abhidhyāyannaciketo'tyasrākṣīḥ
naitāṃ sṛṅkāṃ vittamayīmavāpto
yasyāṃ majjanti bahavo manuṣyāḥ
2.4
dūramete viparīte viṣūcī
avidyā yā ca vidyeti jñātā
vidyābhīpsinaṃ naciketasaṃ manye
na tvā kāmā bahavo'lolupanta
2.5
avidyāyāmantare vartamānāḥ
svayaṃ dhīrāḥ paṇḍitaṃmanyamānāḥ
dandramyamāṇāḥ pariyanti mūḍhā
andhenaiva nīyamānā yathāndhāḥ

2.3You have turned away, Nachiketa, from the desires that are dear and wear a dear shape, having looked them over. You have not taken the road paved with wealth, in which many men sink. Far apart and opposed are these two: ignorance, and what is known as knowledge. I take Nachiketa to be one who wants knowledge; the many desires did not tear you away. Living in the middle of ignorance, wise in their own eyes, thinking themselves learned, the deluded go round and round, like blind men led by one who is blind.

Verse 4 sets the pair the Isha also works with, and sets it as a fork rather than a ladder: vidya and avidya run in opposite directions. Verse 5 is the sharpest sentence in the chapter and the one most often lifted out of it. What it condemns is not ignorance but the confidence that comes with a certain amount of learning, and the image of the blind following the blind is repeated almost word for word in the Mundaka.

The loop that a little learning closes living in ignorance and not knowing it some learning got and held by heart round and round getting nowhere wise in their own eyes thinking themselves learned not the ignorance but the confidence the guide is blind as well The same sentence comes back in the Mundaka almost word for word. Two verses on, the text rules out the other way in: the matter is not to be got by argument.
Figure 42.12 — Verse 2.5. The loop closes on itself, and what the verse condemns is the confidence rather than the ignorance.
न साम्परायः प्रतिभाति बालं
प्रमाद्यन्तं वित्तमोहेन मूढम् ।
अयं लोको नास्ति पर इति मानी
पुनः पुनर्वशमापद्यते मे ॥ ६ ॥
श्रवणायापि बहुभिर्यो न लभ्यः
श‍ृण्वन्तोऽपि बहवो यं न विद्युः ।
आश्चर्यो वक्ता कुशलोऽस्य लब्धा
आश्चर्यो ज्ञाता कुशलानुशिष्टः ॥ ७ ॥
न नरेणावरेण प्रोक्त एष
सुविज्ञेयो बहुधा चिन्त्यमानः ।
अनन्यप्रोक्ते गतिरत्र नास्ति
अणीयान् ह्यतर्क्यमणुप्रमाणात् ॥ ८ ॥
नैषा तर्केण मतिरापनेया
प्रोक्तान्येनैव सुज्ञानाय प्रेष्ठ ।
यां त्वमापः सत्यधृतिर्बतासि
त्वादृङ्नो भूयान्नचिकेतः प्रष्टा ॥ ९ ॥
na sāmparāyaḥ pratibhāti bālaṃ
pramādyantaṃ vittamohena mūḍham
ayaṃ loko nāsti para iti mānī
punaḥ punarvaśamāpadyate me
2.7
śravaṇāyāpi bahubhiryo na labhyaḥ
śaṛṇvanto'pi bahavo yaṃ na vidyuḥ
āścaryo vaktā kuśalo'sya labdhā
āścaryo jñātā kuśalānuśiṣṭaḥ
2.8
na nareṇāvareṇa prokta eṣa
suvijñeyo bahudhā cintyamānaḥ
ananyaprokte gatiratra nāsti
aṇīyān hyatarkyamaṇupramāṇāt
2.9
naiṣā tarkeṇa matirāpaneyā
proktānyenaiva sujñānāya preṣṭha
yāṃ tvamāpaḥ satyadhṛtirbatāsi
tvādṛṅno bhūyānnaciketaḥ praṣṭā

2.6The crossing does not appear to the careless boy, deluded by the trance of wealth. Thinking this world is and there is no other, he falls into my power again and again. Many do not get so much as to hear of it; many who hear do not know it. A wonder is the one who tells it, an adept the one who wins it, a wonder the one who knows it, taught by an adept. Told by a lesser man it is not well understood, for it is thought about in many ways. Where there is no teaching from one who has become it, there is no going; it is finer than fine, beyond argument. This thought is not to be got by argument. Told by another, dear one, it is well known. You have reached it, being fixed in truth. May we find a questioner like you, Nachiketa.

Verse 8 contains the whole doctrine of the teacher: ananya-prokte gatir atra nasti, where the teaching does not come from one who is not other than it, there is no way forward. Verse 9 adds the negative half of the same claim by ruling out the alternative method, and the word it rules out is tarka, reasoning. The Katha does not say that reasoning is wrong; it says that reasoning does not terminate, since the matter is finer than any premise available to it.

जानाम्यहं शेवधिरित्यनित्यं
न ह्यध्रुवैः प्राप्यते हि ध्रुवं तत् ।
ततो मया नाचिकेतश्चितोऽग्निः
अनित्यैर्द्रव्यैः प्राप्तवानस्मि नित्यम् ॥ १० ॥
कामस्याप्तिं जगतः प्रतिष्ठां
क्रतोरानन्त्यमभयस्य पारम् ।
स्तोममहदुरुगायं प्रतिष्ठां दृष्ट्वा
धृत्या धीरो नचिकेतोऽत्यस्राक्षीः ॥ ११ ॥
तं दुर्दर्शं गूढमनुप्रविष्टं
गुहाहितं गह्वरेष्ठं पुराणम् ।
अध्यात्मयोगाधिगमेन देवं
मत्वा धीरो हर्षशोकौ जहाति ॥ १२ ॥
एतच्छ्रुत्वा सम्परिगृह्य मर्त्यः
प्रवृह्य धर्म्यमणुमेतमाप्य ।
स मोदते मोदनीयं हि लब्ध्वा
विवृतं सद्म नचिकेतसं मन्ये ॥ १३ ॥
jānāmyahaṃ śevadhirityanityaṃ
na hyadhruvaiḥ prāpyate hi dhruvaṃ tat
tato mayā nāciketaścito'gniḥ
anityairdravyaiḥ prāptavānasmi nityam
2.11
kāmasyāptiṃ jagataḥ pratiṣṭhāṃ
kratorānantyamabhayasya pāram
stomamahadurugāyaṃ pratiṣṭhāṃ dṛṣṭvā
dhṛtyā dhīro naciketo'tyasrākṣīḥ
2.12
taṃ durdarśaṃ gūḍhamanupraviṣṭaṃ
guhāhitaṃ gahvareṣṭhaṃ purāṇam
adhyātmayogādhigamena devaṃ
matvā dhīro harṣaśokau jahāti
2.13
etacchrutvā samparigṛhya martyaḥ
pravṛhya dharmyamaṇumetamāpya
sa modate modanīyaṃ hi labdhvā
vivṛtaṃ sadma naciketasaṃ manye

2.10I know that the treasure is not lasting, for the steady is not reached by things that do not stay. Therefore I laid the Nachiketa fire, and by things that do not last I have reached what lasts. The end of desire, the ground of the world, the endlessness of the rite, the far shore of fearlessness, the wide-praised greatness, the standing-place — seeing these, Nachiketa, you let them go, being steady. Hard to see, hidden, entered in, set in the cave, lying deep, ancient — thinking on that god by the discipline that turns on the self, the wise man leaves behind both joy and grief. Hearing this and taking hold of it, drawing out the subtle thing that is law, a mortal is glad, having got what is worth gladness. I take the house to be open for Nachiketa.

Yama's admission in verse 10 is remarkable for a god: he says he built his own position out of impermanent materials and knows the limit of what that buys. The phrase in verse 12 for where the Self is found, guha-hitam, set in the cave, is the standard Upanishadic location, and the cave is the heart. Verse 13 closes the frame of the interview; the door is open and the teaching proper begins.

अन्यत्र धर्मादन्यत्राधर्मादन्यत्रास्मात्कृताकृतात् ।
अन्यत्र भूताच्च भव्याच्च
यत्तत्पश्यसि तद्वद ॥ १४ ॥
सर्वे वेदा यत्पदमामनन्ति
तपांसि सर्वाणि च यद्वदन्ति ।
यदिच्छन्तो ब्रह्मचर्यं चरन्ति
तत्ते पदं सङ्ग्रहेण ब्रवीम्योमित्येतत् ॥ १५ ॥
एतद्ध्येवाक्षरं ब्रह्म एतद्ध्येवाक्षरं परम् ।
एतद्ध्येवाक्षरं ज्ञात्वा यो यदिच्छति तस्य तत् ॥ १६ ॥
एतदालम्बनं श्रेष्ठमेतदालम्बनं परम् ।
एतदालम्बनं ज्ञात्वा ब्रह्मलोके महीयते ॥ १७ ॥
anyatra dharmādanyatrādharmādanyatrāsmātkṛtākṛtāt
anyatra bhūtācca bhavyācca
yattatpaśyasi tadvada
2.15
sarve vedā yatpadamāmananti
tapāṃsi sarvāṇi ca yadvadanti
yadicchanto brahmacaryaṃ caranti
tatte padaṃ saṅgraheṇa bravīmyomityetat
2.16
etaddhyevākṣaraṃ brahma etaddhyevākṣaraṃ param
etaddhyevākṣaraṃ jñātvā yo yadicchati tasya tat
2.17
etadālambanaṃ śreṣṭhametadālambanaṃ param
etadālambanaṃ jñātvā brahmaloke mahīyate

2.14Other than the right and other than the wrong, other than this done and not done, other than what has been and what is to be — what you see as that, tell me. The step that all the Vedas speak of, that all austerities declare, wanting which men live the disciplined life — that step I will tell you in brief. It is OM. This syllable is Brahman; this syllable is the highest. Knowing this syllable, whatever one wants is his. This is the best support; this is the highest support. Knowing this support, one is great in the world of Brahman.

The boy's question in verse 14 asks for something outside every pair the moral vocabulary has, including the pair of done and not done, and the answer is a sound rather than a description. That is the Katha's way of making the same point the Mandukya will make at length: what is beyond every category can be held by a syllable and not by a sentence.

न जायते म्रियते वा विपश्चिन्नायं कुतश्चिन्न बभूव कश्चित् ।
अजो नित्यः शाश्वतोऽयं पुराणो
न हन्यते हन्यमाने शरीरे ॥ १८ ॥
हन्ता चेन्मन्यते हन्तुं हतश्चेन्मन्यते हतम् ।
उभौ तौ न विजानीतो नायं हन्ति न हन्यते ॥ १९ ॥
अणोरणीयान्महतो महीयानात्माऽस्य जन्तोर्निहितो गुहायाम् ।
तमक्रतुः पश्यति वीतशोको
धातुप्रसादान्महिमानमात्मनः ॥ २० ॥
na jāyate mriyate vā vipaścinnāyaṃ kutaścinna babhūva kaścit
ajo nityaḥ śāśvato'yaṃ purāṇo
na hanyate hanyamāne śarīre
2.19
hantā cenmanyate hantuṃ hataścenmanyate hatam
ubhau tau na vijānīto nāyaṃ hanti na hanyate
2.20
aṇoraṇīyānmahato mahīyānātmā'sya jantornihito guhāyām
tamakratuḥ paśyati vītaśoko
dhātuprasādānmahimānamātmanaḥ

2.18The knower is not born and does not die. He has not come from anywhere and has not become anyone. Unborn, lasting, everlasting, ancient, he is not slain when the body is slain. If the slayer thinks to slay, and if the slain thinks himself slain, neither of them understands. This one does not slay and is not slain. Smaller than the small, greater than the great, the Self is set in the hidden place of this creature. Free of craving, free of sorrow, one sees the greatness of the Self by the grace of the ordainer.

Verses 18 and 19 are the two the Bhagavad Gita takes over almost unchanged into its second chapter, where they are spoken on a battlefield and have been read ever since as an argument about killing. In the Katha they are spoken to a boy who has been given away to Death, and they answer his question and no other: what is asked is whether anything survives, and the answer is that the thing in question was never in the class of things that begin.

The last line of verse 20 turns on a variant that the tradition has never settled. Read dhatuh prasadat, it means by the grace of the creator; read dhatu prasadat, it means by the settling of the constituents, that is, of the senses. Nagler's remark is that it makes remarkably little difference, since what grace does is still the senses.

आसीनो दूरं व्रजति शयानो याति सर्वतः ।
कस्तं मदामदं देवं मदन्यो ज्ञातुमर्हति ॥ २१ ॥
अशरीरं शरीरेष्वनवस्थेष्ववस्थितम् ।
महान्तं विभुमात्मानं मत्वा धीरो न शोचति ॥ २२ ॥
नायमात्मा प्रवचनेन लभ्यो
न मेधया न बहुना श्रुतेन ।
यमेवैष वृणुते तेन लभ्यः
तस्यैष आत्मा विवृणुते तनूं स्वाम् ॥ २३ ॥
नाविरतो दुश्चरितान्नाशान्तो नासमाहितः ।
नाशान्तमानसो वाऽपि प्रज्ञानेनैनमाप्नुयात् ॥ २४ ॥
āsīno dūraṃ vrajati śayāno yāti sarvataḥ
kastaṃ madāmadaṃ devaṃ madanyo jñātumarhati
2.22
aśarīraṃ śarīreṣvanavastheṣvavasthitam
mahāntaṃ vibhumātmānaṃ matvā dhīro na śocati
2.23
nāyamātmā pravacanena labhyo
na medhayā na bahunā śrutena
yamevaiṣa vṛṇute tena labhyaḥ
tasyaiṣa ātmā vivṛṇute tanūṃ svām
2.24
nāvirato duścaritānnāśānto nāsamāhitaḥ
nāśāntamānaso vā'pi prajñānenainamāpnuyāt

2.21Sitting, it travels far; lying down, it goes everywhere. Who but I is fit to know that god, who is joy and no joy? Bodiless among bodies, standing firm among the unstable, great and everywhere — thinking on that Self, the wise man does not grieve. This Self is not to be won by teaching, nor by intelligence, nor by much hearing. It is won by the one whom it chooses; to that one the Self uncovers its own body. Not one who has not stopped from bad conduct, not one unquiet, not one uncollected, not one whose mind is not at peace can reach it by knowing.

Verse 23 is the harder statement, and the alternative reading is worth having: it can also be construed as saying that the Self is won by the one who chooses it, which is equally at home in the collection. Verse 24 is its practical counterweight, and it is a list of disqualifications rather than a list of qualifications. Conduct comes first on the list, before quiet and before concentration.

यस्य ब्रह्म च क्षत्रं च उभे भवत ओदनः ।
मृत्युर्यस्योपसेचनं क इत्था वेद यत्र सः ॥ २५ ॥
yasya brahma ca kṣatraṃ ca ubhe bhavata odanaḥ
mṛtyuryasyopasecanaṃ ka itthā veda yatra saḥ

2.25For whom the priesthood and the nobility are both a dish of rice, and death a sauce upon it — who knows in that way where he is?

The last verse of the chapter is the most violent image in the text. Everything a society reckons as power is food for what the boy is asking about, and what seasons the food is death. The line is meant to close off the thought that the Self is a very large item among items.

ऋतं पिबन्तौ सुकृतस्य लोके
गुहां प्रविष्टौ परमे परार्धे ।
छायातपौ ब्रह्मविदो वदन्ति
पञ्चाग्नयो ये च त्रिणाचिकेताः ॥ १ ॥
यः सेतुरीजानानामक्षरं ब्रह्म यत् परम् ।
अभयं तितीर्षतां पारं नाचिकेतं शकेमहि ॥ २ ॥
ṛtaṃ pibantau sukṛtasya loke
guhāṃ praviṣṭau parame parārdhe
chāyātapau brahmavido vadanti
pañcāgnayo ye ca triṇāciketāḥ
3.2
yaḥ seturījānānāmakṣaraṃ brahma yat param
abhayaṃ titīrṣatāṃ pāraṃ nāciketaṃ śakemahi

3.1Two drink the law in the world of good works, entered into the cave, in the highest place beyond. The knowers of Brahman call them shadow and light, as do those who lay the five fires and the triple Nachiketa fire. May we be able to lay the Nachiketa fire, the bridge for those who sacrifice, and the deathless highest Brahman, fearless, for those who wish to cross to the far shore.

The two in the cave have been read in two ways for as long as there has been a commentary. Shankara takes them as the individual and the supreme Self, the one that eats the fruit of works and the one that only watches; others take the second as the intellect. Both drink rita, the order of things, and only one of them casts a shadow.

Two drink the law in one cave the cave of the heart the one that eats takes the fruit of works the one that looks takes nothing at all called the shadow called the light both drink the same law only one casts a shadow Shankara reads the pair as the individual and the supreme Self; others read the second as the intellect. The difference between them is not position but whether the results of action reach them.
Figure 42.13 — Verse 3.1 as the tradition reads it. Two occupants of one cave, distinguished only by whether the results of action reach them.
आत्मानं रथिनं विद्धि शरीरं रथमेव तु ।
बुद्धिं तु सारथिं विद्धि मनः प्रग्रहमेव च ॥ ३ ॥
इन्द्रियाणि हयानाहुर्विषयां स्तेषु गोचरान् ।
आत्मेन्द्रियमनोयुक्तं भोक्तेत्याहुर्मनीषिणः ॥ ४ ॥
यस्त्वविज्ञानवान्भवत्ययुक्तेन मनसा सदा ।
तस्येन्द्रियाण्यवश्यानि दुष्टाश्वा इव सारथेः ॥ ५ ॥
यस्तु विज्ञानवान्भवति युक्तेन मनसा सदा ।
तस्येन्द्रियाणि वश्यानि सदश्वा इव सारथेः ॥ ६ ॥
ātmānaṃ rathinaṃ viddhi śarīraṃ rathameva tu
buddhiṃ tu sārathiṃ viddhi manaḥ pragrahameva ca
3.4
indriyāṇi hayānāhurviṣayāṃ steṣu gocarān
ātmendriyamanoyuktaṃ bhoktetyāhurmanīṣiṇaḥ
3.5
yastvavijñānavānbhavatyayuktena manasā sadā
tasyendriyāṇyavaśyāni duṣṭāśvā iva sāratheḥ
3.6
yastu vijñānavānbhavati yuktena manasā sadā
tasyendriyāṇi vaśyāni sadaśvā iva sāratheḥ

3.3Know the Self as the rider in the chariot, and the body as the chariot. Know the intellect as the driver, and the mind as the reins. The senses, they say, are the horses; the objects of sense are their roads. The Self joined to body and senses and mind is what the wise call the enjoyer. The one who is without understanding, whose mind is never yoked — his senses are not to be controlled, like the bad horses of a driver. The one who has understanding, whose mind is always yoked — his senses are to be controlled, like the good horses of a driver.

Five parts and one loose joint the image what it stands for what it does the rider the chariot the reins the driver the horses the Self the body the mind the intellect the senses owns the journey, does not steer carries, and is carried carries the decision to the horses decides; is obeyed only through the reins pull towards their pastures, the objects Slack reins and the horses are bad horses; held reins and the same horses are good ones. Nothing else changes.
Figure 42.14 — The chariot of verses 3.3 to 3.9. Five parts, each a faculty, and one relation that decides everything: whether the reins are in the driver's hand.
यस्त्वविज्ञानवान्भवत्यमनस्कः सदाऽशुचिः ।
न स तत्पदमाप्नोति संसारं चाधिगच्छति ॥ ७ ॥
यस्तु विज्ञानवान्भवति समनस्कः सदा शुचिः ।
स तु तत्पदमाप्नोति यस्माद्भूयो न जायते ॥ ८ ॥
विज्ञानसारथिर्यस्तु मनः प्रग्रहवान्नरः ।
सोऽध्वनः पारमाप्नोति तद्विष्णोः परमं पदम् ॥ ९ ॥
yastvavijñānavānbhavatyamanaskaḥ sadā'śuciḥ
na sa tatpadamāpnoti saṃsāraṃ cādhigacchati
3.8
yastu vijñānavānbhavati samanaskaḥ sadā śuciḥ
sa tu tatpadamāpnoti yasmādbhūyo na jāyate
3.9
vijñānasārathiryastu manaḥ pragrahavānnaraḥ
so'dhvanaḥ pāramāpnoti tadviṣṇoḥ paramaṃ padam

3.7The one who is without understanding, thoughtless, always unclean, does not reach that step, and comes to the round of birth and death. The one who has understanding, thoughtful, always clean, reaches that step, from which he is not born again. But the man who has understanding for his driver and holds the reins of the mind reaches the end of the road, that highest step of Vishnu.

The model is precise about who does what. The rider owns the journey and does not steer; the intellect steers and does not own; the mind is not a faculty but a linkage, the thing through which the driver's decision reaches the horses, and it is the part that can be slack. The word for the roads the horses travel, gocarah, means cow pastures, and it became a technical term in Sankhya. Plato uses the same image in the Phaedrus, less worked out. Two verses later the text turns the chariot into a ladder.

इन्द्रियेभ्यः परा ह्यर्था अर्थेभ्यश्च परं मनः ।
मनसस्तु परा बुद्धिर्बुद्धेरात्मा महान्परः ॥ १० ॥
महतः परमव्यक्तमव्यक्तात्पुरुषः परः ।
पुरुषान्न परं किंचित्सा काष्ठा सा परा गतिः ॥ ११ ॥
एष सर्वेषु भूतेषु गूढोऽऽत्मा न प्रकाशते ।
दृश्यते त्वग्र्यया बुद्ध्या सूक्ष्मया सूक्ष्मदर्शिभिः ॥ १२ ॥
यच्छेद्वाङ्मनसी प्राज्ञस्तद्यच्छेज्ज्ञान आत्मनि ।
ज्ञानमात्मनि महति नियच्छेत्तद्यच्छेच्छान्त आत्मनि ॥ १३ ॥
indriyebhyaḥ parā hyarthā arthebhyaśca paraṃ manaḥ
manasastu parā buddhirbuddherātmā mahānparaḥ
3.11
mahataḥ paramavyaktamavyaktātpuruṣaḥ paraḥ
puruṣānna paraṃ kiṃcitsā kāṣṭhā sā parā gatiḥ
3.12
eṣa sarveṣu bhūteṣu gūḍho''tmā na prakāśate
dṛśyate tvagryayā buddhyā sūkṣmayā sūkṣmadarśibhiḥ
3.13
yacchedvāṅmanasī prājñastadyacchejjñāna ātmani
jñānamātmani mahati niyacchettadyacchecchānta ātmani

3.10Beyond the senses are the objects; beyond the objects is the mind; beyond the mind is the intellect; beyond the intellect is the great Self. Beyond the great is the unmanifest; beyond the unmanifest is the Person. Beyond the Person there is nothing at all: that is the limit, that is the highest goal. Hidden in all beings, this Self does not shine out. It is seen by those who see what is fine, with a fine and pointed understanding. Let the wise man hold back speech in the mind; let him hold that in the knowing self; let him hold knowing in the great self; let him hold that in the self that is at peace.

What is beyond what, verses 3.10 and 3.11 senseseye, ear objectsthe seen mindlinkage intellectdecides the greatmahat unmanifestavyakta the Personthe end each is said to be beyond the one before it the surprise Sense objects are ranked above the senses, not below: what is met is shaped by the equipment. The series is not open-ended. It stops at a term said to have nothing past it.
Figure 42.15 — The order of verses 3.10 and 3.11. The sense objects are ranked above the senses, not below them, and the series ends at a term with nothing beyond it.

The order in verse 10 is the one that surprises, and Nagler insists it is what the text actually says: the senses do not come first and the objects second, but the other way about. Sense objects are ranked above the senses and below the mind, which is to say that the world as encountered is already a product of the equipment that encounters it. Verse 13 turns the same ladder into an instruction by running it upward one rung at a time, each faculty folded into the one above it.

Held back, one rung at a time each faculty is folded into the one above it speech held in the mind the mind held in knowing the knowing self held in the great the great self held in the last the self at peace nothing holds it Verse 12: it does not shine out, and is seen only by a fine and pointed understanding. The ladder of verse 10 is a rank; this is the operation that climbs it.
Figure 42.16 — Verse 3.13 as an operation. Each faculty is held in the one above it until the last, which nothing holds.
उत्तिष्ठत जाग्रत
प्राप्य वरान्निबोधत ।
क्षुरस्य धारा निशिता दुरत्यया
दुर्गं पथस्तत्कवयो वदन्ति ॥ १४ ॥
अशब्दमस्पर्शमरूपमव्ययं
तथाऽरसं नित्यमगन्धवच्च यत् ।
अनाद्यनन्तं महतः परं ध्रुवं
निचाय्य तन्मृत्युमुखात् प्रमुच्यते ॥ १५ ॥
नाचिकेतमुपाख्यानं मृत्युप्रोक्तं सनातनम् ।
उक्त्वा श्रुत्वा च मेधावी ब्रह्मलोके महीयते ॥ १६ ॥
य इमं परमं गुह्यं श्रावयेद् ब्रह्मसंसदि ।
प्रयतः श्राद्धकाले वा तदानन्त्याय कल्पते ।
तदानन्त्याय कल्पत इति ॥ १७ ॥
uttiṣṭhata jāgrata
prāpya varānnibodhata
kṣurasya dhārā niśitā duratyayā
durgaṃ pathastatkavayo vadanti
3.15
aśabdamasparśamarūpamavyayaṃ
tathā'rasaṃ nityamagandhavacca yat
anādyanantaṃ mahataḥ paraṃ dhruvaṃ
nicāyya tanmṛtyumukhāt pramucyate
3.16
nāciketamupākhyānaṃ mṛtyuproktaṃ sanātanam
uktvā śrutvā ca medhāvī brahmaloke mahīyate
3.17
ya imaṃ paramaṃ guhyaṃ śrāvayed brahmasaṃsadi
prayataḥ śrāddhakāle vā tadānantyāya kalpate
tadānantyāya kalpata iti

3.14Arise, awake; having found the great ones, learn. Sharp as a razor's edge and hard to cross: the poets call that path hard to go. Soundless, untouchable, formless, undecaying; likewise tasteless, lasting, and without smell; without beginning or end, beyond the great, firm — knowing that, one is released from the mouth of death. The everlasting story of Nachiketa, told by Death — telling it and hearing it, the wise man is great in the world of Brahman. Whoever recites this highest secret in an assembly of those who know Brahman, or at the time of the offering to the dead, being pure, is fitted for endlessness — fitted for endlessness.

Verse 14 is the line the Katha is quoted for, and Easwaran takes its severity at face value: the ascent is dangerous, which is why the relation with a teacher who has been up and come back matters more in this collection than anything else. Verses 16 and 17 close the third chapter with the formula that marks the end of a unit of recitation, and in editions that divide the text into two parts of three chapters they close the first part.

Arise, awake, and learn from those who have been arise uttishthata awake jagrata having found the great then learn sharp as a razor's edge hard to cross, the poets say and no width at all to stand on Easwaran takes the severity at face value: it is why the teacher matters so much here. What is offered is not encouragement but the length of the odds.
Figure 42.17 — Verse 3.14. Three imperatives on one side and the width of the path on the other.
पराञ्चि खानि व्यतृणत् स्वयम्भूस्तस्मात्पराङ्पश्यति नान्तरात्मन् ।
कश्चिद्धीरः प्रत्यगात्मानमैक्षदावृत्तचक्षुरमृतत्वमिच्छन् ॥ १ ॥
पराचः कामाननुयन्ति बालास्ते मृत्योर्यन्ति विततस्य पाशम् ।
अथ धीरा अमृतत्वं विदित्वा
ध्रुवमध्रुवेष्विह न प्रार्थयन्ते ॥ २ ॥
येन रूपं रसं गन्धं शब्दान् स्पर्शांश्च मैथुनान् ।
एतेनैव विजानाति किमत्र परिशिष्यते । एतद्वै तत् ॥ ३ ॥
स्वप्नान्तं जागरितान्तं चोभौ येनानुपश्यति ।
महान्तं विभुमात्मानं मत्वा धीरो न शोचति ॥ ४ ॥
parāñci khāni vyatṛṇat svayambhūstasmātparāṅpaśyati nāntarātman
kaściddhīraḥ pratyagātmānamaikṣadāvṛttacakṣuramṛtatvamicchan
4.2
parācaḥ kāmānanuyanti bālāste mṛtyoryanti vitatasya pāśam
atha dhīrā amṛtatvaṃ viditvā
dhruvamadhruveṣviha na prārthayante
4.3
yena rūpaṃ rasaṃ gandhaṃ śabdān sparśāṃśca maithunān
etenaiva vijānāti kimatra pariśiṣyate | etadvai tat
4.4
svapnāntaṃ jāgaritāntaṃ cobhau yenānupaśyati
mahāntaṃ vibhumātmānaṃ matvā dhīro na śocati

4.1The self-existent pierced the openings outward; therefore one looks outward and not into the self within. Some wise man, wanting the deathless, turned his eyes around and saw the Self within. Children run after outward desires and walk into the snare of wide-spread death. The wise, knowing the deathless, do not look here among unstable things for what stands. By which one knows form and taste and smell and sounds and touches and coupling — by this alone one knows. What is left over here? This is That. By which one sees both the end of dream and the end of waking — knowing that as the great and pervading Self, the wise man does not grieve.

The fourth chapter opens with a piece of anatomy used as an argument. The openings of the senses are cut outward, so the natural direction of attention is outward, and the one operation the whole collection asks for is described as avritta-chakshus, the eye turned back. The refrain that closes verse 3 and returns through the chapter, etad vai tat, this is That, is the chapter's signature; each verse points at something and says the pointing is the same in every case.

य इमं मध्वदं वेद आत्मानं जीवमन्तिकात् ।
ईशानं भूतभव्यस्य न ततो विजुगुप्सते । एतद्वै तत् ॥ ५ ॥
यः पूर्वं तपसो जातमद्भ्यः पूर्वमजायत ।
गुहां प्रविश्य तिष्ठन्तं यो भूतेभिर्व्यपश्यत । एतद्वै तत् ॥ ६ ॥
या प्राणेन संभवत्यदितिर्देवतामयी ।
गुहां प्रविश्य तिष्ठन्तीं या भूतेभिर्व्यजायत । एतद्वै तत् ॥ ७ ॥
अरण्योर्निहितो जातवेदा गर्भ इव सुभृतो गर्भिणीभिः ।
दिवे दिवे ईड्यो जागृवद्भिर्हविष्मद्भिर्मनुष्येभिरग्निः । एतद्वै तत् ॥ ८ ॥
ya imaṃ madhvadaṃ veda ātmānaṃ jīvamantikāt
īśānaṃ bhūtabhavyasya na tato vijugupsate | etadvai tat
4.6
yaḥ pūrvaṃ tapaso jātamadbhyaḥ pūrvamajāyata
guhāṃ praviśya tiṣṭhantaṃ yo bhūtebhirvyapaśyata | etadvai tat
4.7
yā prāṇena saṃbhavatyaditirdevatāmayī
guhāṃ praviśya tiṣṭhantīṃ yā bhūtebhirvyajāyata | etadvai tat
4.8
araṇyornihito jātavedā garbha iva subhṛto garbhiṇībhiḥ
dive dive īḍyo jāgṛvadbhirhaviṣmadbhirmanuṣyebhiragniḥ | etadvai tat

4.5Whoever knows this Self, the eater of honey, the living one, from close by, the ruler of what was and what will be, shrinks from nothing after that. This is That. Whoever sees the one born before the heat, born before the waters, who has entered the cave and stands there, looking out through the beings — this is That. That which comes to be through breath, the infinite mother of the gods, who has entered the cave and stands there, who was born through the beings — this is That. The knower of all born hidden in the two fire-sticks, carried like a well-tended child by pregnant women, to be worshipped day after day by waking men who bring the offering — this is That.

The honey-eater in verse 5 is the individual soul, taking the taste of its own works, and the same phrase runs through the Mundaka and the Shvetashvatara as one half of the image of two birds on a tree. Verse 8 puts the Self where fire is before it is struck: present in the two sticks, invisible in both, produced by neither alone.

यतश्चोदेति सूर्योऽस्तं यत्र च गच्छति ।
तं देवाः सर्वेऽर्पितास्तदु नात्येति कश्चन । एतद्वै तत् ॥ ९ ॥
यदेवेह तदमुत्र यदमुत्र तदन्विह ।
मृत्योः स मृत्युमाप्नोति य इह नानेव पश्यति ॥ १० ॥
मनसैवेदमाप्तव्यं नेह नानाऽस्ति किंचन ।
मृत्योः स मृत्युं गच्छति य इह नानेव पश्यति ॥ ११ ॥
अङ्गुष्ठमात्रः पुरुषो मध्य आत्मनि तिष्ठति ।
ईशानं भूतभव्यस्य न ततो विजुगुप्सते । एतद्वै तत् ॥ १२ ॥
yataścodeti sūryo'staṃ yatra ca gacchati
taṃ devāḥ sarve'rpitāstadu nātyeti kaścana | etadvai tat
4.10
yadeveha tadamutra yadamutra tadanviha
mṛtyoḥ sa mṛtyumāpnoti ya iha nāneva paśyati
4.11
manasaivedamāptavyaṃ neha nānā'sti kiṃcana
mṛtyoḥ sa mṛtyuṃ gacchati ya iha nāneva paśyati
4.12
aṅguṣṭhamātraḥ puruṣo madhya ātmani tiṣṭhati
īśānaṃ bhūtabhavyasya na tato vijugupsate | etadvai tat

4.9From where the sun rises and where it goes down — on that all the gods are fixed, and nobody goes past it. This is That. What is here is there, and what is there is here as well. He goes from death to death who sees anything like difference here. This is to be reached by the mind alone. There is no difference at all here. He goes from death to death who sees anything like difference here. The Person the size of a thumb stands in the middle of the self, ruler of what was and what will be. From that one shrinks no more. This is That.

Verses 10 and 11 are the same sentence twice with the second half changed, and the pair is the clearest statement of non-duality in the Katha. The thumb-sized person is the text's oddest image and its most repeated. It is not a homunculus; the measure is a way of locating the Self in the body without granting it a body.

अङ्गुष्ठमात्रः पुरुषो ज्योतिरिवाधूमकः ।
ईशानो भूतभव्यस्य स एवाद्य स उ श्वः । एतद्वै तत् ॥ १३ ॥
यथोदकं दुर्गे वृष्टं पर्वतेषु विधावति ।
एवं धर्मान् पृथक् पश्यंस्तानेवानुविधावति ॥ १४ ॥
यथोदकं शुद्धे शुद्धमासिक्तं तादृगेव भवति ।
एवं मुनेर्विजानत आत्मा भवति गौतम ॥ १५ ॥
aṅguṣṭhamātraḥ puruṣo jyotirivādhūmakaḥ
īśāno bhūtabhavyasya sa evādya sa u śvaḥ | etadvai tat
4.14
yathodakaṃ durge vṛṣṭaṃ parvateṣu vidhāvati
evaṃ dharmān pṛthak paśyaṃstānevānuvidhāvati
4.15
yathodakaṃ śuddhe śuddhamāsiktaṃ tādṛgeva bhavati
evaṃ munervijānata ātmā bhavati gautama

4.13The Person the size of a thumb is like a light without smoke, ruler of what was and what will be. He is today and he is tomorrow. This is That. As water rained on a height runs away among the hills, so one who sees the laws as separate runs after them. As pure water poured into pure water becomes just that, so becomes the self of the sage who knows, Gautama.

The two water images are placed together and point in opposite directions. Rain on a ridge is divided by the shape it falls on and scatters; water poured into water takes on no shape at all and cannot afterwards be told from what it was poured into. Between them they give the text's account of what is lost and what is not lost when separateness ends.

पुरमेकादशद्वारमजस्यावक्रचेतसः ।
अनुष्ठाय न शोचति विमुक्तश्च विमुच्यते । एतद्वै तत् ॥ १ ॥
हंसः शुचिषद्वसुरन्तरिक्षसद्होता वेदिषदतिथिर्दुरोणसत् ।
नृषद्वरसदृतसद्व्योमसद्
अब्जा गोजा ऋतजा अद्रिजा ऋतं बृहत् ॥ २ ॥
ऊर्ध्वं प्राणमुन्नयत्यपानं प्रत्यगस्यति ।
मध्ये वामनमासीनं विश्वे देवा उपासते ॥ ३ ॥
puramekādaśadvāramajasyāvakracetasaḥ
anuṣṭhāya na śocati vimuktaśca vimucyate | etadvai tat
5.2
haṃsaḥ śuciṣadvasurantarikṣasadhotā vediṣadatithirduroṇasat
nṛṣadvarasadṛtasadvyomasad
abjā gojā ṛtajā adrijā ṛtaṃ bṛhat
5.3
ūrdhvaṃ prāṇamunnayatyapānaṃ pratyagasyati
madhye vāmanamāsīnaṃ viśve devā upāsate

5.1Of the unborn whose thought is not crooked there is a city with eleven gates. Attending to it one does not grieve; released, one is free. This is That. The swan in the clear sky, the bright one in the middle air, the priest at the altar, the guest in the house; among men, among gods, in the order of things, in the sky; born of water, born of earth, born of the order, born of the rock — the great order. He leads the upward breath up and pushes the downward breath down. The dwarf seated in the middle is what all the gods worship.

The eleven gates are the body's openings, counted as the seven in the head, the two below, the navel and the opening at the crown. Verse 2 is lifted from a Rig Veda hymn and is the oldest-sounding thing in the Katha; verse 3 puts the same occupant in the middle of the breathing, between the breath that goes up and the breath that goes down.

A city with eleven gates seven in the head eyes, ears, nostrils, mouth two below the lower openings the navel one the crown one, and the one that matters eleven gates, one dweller attending to it, one does not grieve The Shvetashvatara counts nine, leaving the navel and the crown out of the tally. Verse 3 seats the same occupant between the breath that rises and the breath that falls.
Figure 42.18 — Verse 5.1. The openings counted, and the one occupant they are counted for.
अस्य विस्रंसमानस्य शरीरस्थस्य देहिनः ।
देहाद्विमुच्यमानस्य किमत्र परिशिष्यते । एतद्वै तत् ॥ ४ ॥
न प्राणेन नापानेन मर्त्यो जीवति कश्चन ।
इतरेण तु जीवन्ति यस्मिन्नेतावुपाश्रितौ ॥ ५ ॥
हन्त त इदं प्रवक्ष्यामि गुह्यं ब्रह्म सनातनम् ।
यथा च मरणं प्राप्य आत्मा भवति गौतम ॥ ६ ॥
योनिमन्ये प्रपद्यन्ते शरीरत्वाय देहिनः ।
स्थाणुमन्येऽनुसंयन्ति यथाकर्म यथाश्रुतम् ॥ ७ ॥
asya visraṃsamānasya śarīrasthasya dehinaḥ
dehādvimucyamānasya kimatra pariśiṣyate | etadvai tat
5.5
na prāṇena nāpānena martyo jīvati kaścana
itareṇa tu jīvanti yasminnetāvupāśritau
5.6
hanta ta idaṃ pravakṣyāmi guhyaṃ brahma sanātanam
yathā ca maraṇaṃ prāpya ātmā bhavati gautama
5.7
yonimanye prapadyante śarīratvāya dehinaḥ
sthāṇumanye'nusaṃyanti yathākarma yathāśrutam

5.4When this body-dweller, seated in the body, comes loose and is released from the body, what is left over here? This is That. No mortal lives by the upward breath or the downward breath. Men live by another, on which these two depend. I will tell you the secret, the everlasting Brahman, and how it is with the self when it has come to dying, Gautama. Some body-dwellers enter a womb to take a body; others go into the stationary, according to their works and according to what they have learned.

Verse 5 separates life from breathing, which is the distinction on which the Prashna will build a whole chapter. Verse 7 gives the Katha's one sentence on what decides a rebirth, and it names two things: yatha-karma, according to what was done, and yatha-shrutam, according to what was heard and learned. Knowledge is treated there as a cause and not only as a result.

What breathing is not, and what is carried over breath up, breath down nobody lives by these the one in the middle both depend on it at death what is carried two things, not one what was done the acts what was learned a cause, not a result Two destinations follow: a womb for those who take a body again, the stationary for the rest. Verses 5.5 to 5.7 of the Katha.
Figure 42.19 — Verses 5.5 to 5.7. Breathing is separated from living, and what is carried across is named as two things rather than one.
य एष सुप्तेषु जागर्ति कामं कामं पुरुषो निर्मिमाणः ।
तदेव शुक्रं तद्ब्रह्म तदेवामृतमुच्यते ।
तस्मिंल्लोकाः श्रिताः सर्वे तदु नात्येति कश्चन । एतद्वै तत् ॥ ८ ॥
अग्निर्यथैको भुवनं प्रविष्टो
रूपं रूपं प्रतिरूपो बभूव ।
एकस्तथा सर्वभूतान्तरात्मा
रूपं रूपं प्रतिरूपो बहिश्च ॥ ९ ॥
वायुर्यथैको भुवनं प्रविष्टो
रूपं रूपं प्रतिरूपो बभूव ।
एकस्तथा सर्वभूतान्तरात्मा
रूपं रूपं प्रतिरूपो बहिश्च ॥ १० ॥
सूर्यो यथा सर्वलोकस्य चक्षुः
न लिप्यते चाक्षुषैर्बाह्यदोषैः ।
एकस्तथा सर्वभूतान्तरात्मा
न लिप्यते लोकदुःखेन बाह्यः ॥ ११ ॥
ya eṣa supteṣu jāgarti kāmaṃ kāmaṃ puruṣo nirmimāṇaḥ
tadeva śukraṃ tadbrahma tadevāmṛtamucyate
tasmiṃllokāḥ śritāḥ sarve tadu nātyeti kaścana | etadvai tat
5.9
agniryathaiko bhuvanaṃ praviṣṭo
rūpaṃ rūpaṃ pratirūpo babhūva
ekastathā sarvabhūtāntarātmā
rūpaṃ rūpaṃ pratirūpo bahiśca
5.10
vāyuryathaiko bhuvanaṃ praviṣṭo
rūpaṃ rūpaṃ pratirūpo babhūva
ekastathā sarvabhūtāntarātmā
rūpaṃ rūpaṃ pratirūpo bahiśca
5.11
sūryo yathā sarvalokasya cakṣuḥ
na lipyate cākṣuṣairbāhyadoṣaiḥ
ekastathā sarvabhūtāntarātmā
na lipyate lokaduḥkhena bāhyaḥ

5.8The Person who stays awake in those who sleep, shaping desire after desire — that is the bright, that is Brahman, that alone is called the deathless. On it all the worlds rest, and nobody goes past it. This is That. As one fire, having entered the world, takes the shape of every shape, so the one inner Self of all beings takes the shape of every shape, and is outside them. As one wind, having entered the world, takes the shape of every shape, so the one inner Self of all beings takes the shape of every shape, and is outside them. As the sun, the eye of the whole world, is not stained by the faults of eyes outside it, so the one inner Self of all beings is not stained by the sorrow of the world, being outside it.

The three comparisons in verses 9 to 11 are a set, and the third is not a repetition. Fire and wind show how one thing can be many without dividing; the sun shows the limit of what contact costs. What the eye looks at does not soil the light by which it looks, and the claim carried across is that the Self is present in suffering without being an instance of it.

One thing, and the shape of everything it enters the one what it does and also one fire entering the world takes the shape of every shape is outside them one wind entering the world takes the shape of every shape is outside them the inner Self of all beings takes the shape of every shape is outside them The same sentence is said three times with the subject changed, which is the whole argument. Nothing is claimed about division: what takes many shapes is not thereby cut up.
Figure 42.20 — Verses 5.9 and 5.10. The same sentence three times with the subject changed; the last is the one being argued for.
What the eye looks at does not stain the light what is present what it meets what does not follow the sun, the eye of the whole world the faults of the eyes that look it is not stained by them the inner Self of all beings the sorrow of the world it is not stained by that Fire and wind show how one can be many; the sun shows the limit of what contact costs. The claim carried across is presence in suffering without being an instance of it.
Figure 42.21 — Verse 5.11. The third comparison is not a repetition: it is about what contact costs.
एको वशी सर्वभूतान्तरात्मा
एकं रूपं बहुधा यः करोति ।
तमात्मस्थं येऽनुपश्यन्ति धीराः
तेषां सुखं शाश्वतं नेतरेषाम् ॥ १२ ॥
नित्योऽनित्यानां चेतनश्चेतनानाम्
एको बहूनां यो विदधाति कामान् ।
तमात्मस्थं येऽनुपश्यन्ति धीराः
तेषां शान्तिः शाश्वती नेतरेषाम् ॥ १३ ॥
तदेतदिति मन्यन्तेऽनिर्देश्यं परमं सुखम् ।
कथं नु तद्विजानीयां किमु भाति विभाति वा ॥ १४ ॥
न तत्र सूर्यो भाति न चन्द्रतारकं
नेमा विद्युतो भान्ति कुतोऽयमग्निः ।
तमेव भान्तमनुभाति सर्वं
तस्य भासा सर्वमिदं विभाति ॥ १५ ॥
eko vaśī sarvabhūtāntarātmā
ekaṃ rūpaṃ bahudhā yaḥ karoti
tamātmasthaṃ ye'nupaśyanti dhīrāḥ
teṣāṃ sukhaṃ śāśvataṃ netareṣām
5.13
nityo'nityānāṃ cetanaścetanānām
eko bahūnāṃ yo vidadhāti kāmān
tamātmasthaṃ ye'nupaśyanti dhīrāḥ
teṣāṃ śāntiḥ śāśvatī netareṣām
5.14
tadetaditi manyante'nirdeśyaṃ paramaṃ sukham
kathaṃ nu tadvijānīyāṃ kimu bhāti vibhāti vā
5.15
na tatra sūryo bhāti na candratārakaṃ
nemā vidyuto bhānti kuto'yamagniḥ
tameva bhāntamanubhāti sarvaṃ
tasya bhāsā sarvamidaṃ vibhāti

5.12The one ruler, the inner Self of all beings, who makes one form into many — the wise who see him standing in the self, and not others, have lasting happiness. The everlasting among things that pass, the conscious among the conscious, the one among many, who deals out desires — the wise who see him standing in the self, and not others, have lasting peace. They think: this is it, the highest happiness that cannot be pointed at. How then shall I know it? Does it shine, or does it shine by reflection? There the sun does not shine, nor the moon and stars, nor do these lightnings shine; how then this fire? All shine after it as it shines; by its light all this is lit.

Verse 14 is a student's question of the most practical kind — by what light would one see the thing that is being described — and verse 15 refuses the terms of the question rather than answering it. The verse is quoted more than any other line in the Katha, and the Mundaka and the Shvetashvatara both take it over word for word.

By what light would that be seen does it shine, or shine by reflection? the sun the moon and stars the lightnings this fire all shine after it as it shines none of them shines there The verse refuses the terms of the question rather than answering it. The Mundaka and the Shvetashvatara both take it over word for word.
Figure 42.22 — Verses 5.14 and 5.15. Every lamp the question could mean is named and put out.
ऊर्ध्वमूलोऽवाक्शाख एषोऽश्वत्थः सनातनः ।
तदेव शुक्रं तद्ब्रह्म तदेवामृतमुच्यते ।
तस्मिंल्लोकाः श्रिताः सर्वे तदु नात्येति कश्चन । एतद्वै तत् ॥ १ ॥
ūrdhvamūlo'vākśākha eṣo'śvatthaḥ sanātanaḥ
tadeva śukraṃ tadbrahma tadevāmṛtamucyate
tasmiṃllokāḥ śritāḥ sarve tadu nātyeti kaścana | etadvai tat

6.1Roots above, branches below, this everlasting fig tree stands. That is the bright, that is Brahman, that alone is called the deathless. On it all the worlds rest, and nobody goes past it. This is That.

The fig tree with its root above, verse 6.1 the root, above held up by nothing the worlds bodies and names gods and creatures all that grows The branches are where change is visible; the root is the one term the branches do not support in return. The Gita takes the image over in its fifteenth chapter and tells the reader to cut the tree down.
Figure 42.23 — The tree of verse 6.1, inverted. The root is the one thing not supported by anything else; every world hangs from it, and the branches are the direction in which growth is visible.

The inverted tree is an old image and the Gita takes it over in its fifteenth chapter. What it encodes is a claim about the direction of dependence: the visible part, the part that grows and is cut and grows again, is downstream of a source that does not appear among the things it supports.

यदिदं किं च जगत् सर्वं प्राण एजति निःसृतम् ।
महद्भयं वज्रमुद्यतं य एतद्विदुरमृतास्ते भवन्ति ॥ २ ॥
भयादस्याग्निस्तपति भयात्तपति सूर्यः ।
भयादिन्द्रश्च वायुश्च मृत्युर्धावति पञ्चमः ॥ ३ ॥
इह चेदशकद्बोद्धुं प्राक्षरीरस्य विस्रसः ।
ततः सर्गेषु लोकेषु शरीरत्वाय कल्पते ॥ ४ ॥
yadidaṃ kiṃ ca jagat sarvaṃ prāṇa ejati niḥsṛtam
mahadbhayaṃ vajramudyataṃ ya etadviduramṛtāste bhavanti
6.3
bhayādasyāgnistapati bhayāttapati sūryaḥ
bhayādindraśca vāyuśca mṛtyurdhāvati pañcamaḥ
6.4
iha cedaśakadboddhuṃ prākṣarīrasya visrasaḥ
tataḥ sargeṣu lokeṣu śarīratvāya kalpate

6.2All this world, whatever there is, moves in the breath that has come forth from it. It is a great terror, a raised thunderbolt. Those who know that become deathless. For fear of it the fire burns; for fear the sun burns; for fear Indra and the wind, and death as the fifth, run on. If one has been able to wake to it here, before the body falls away, then he is fit to take a body in the worlds that are made.

The terror of verse 2 is not a threat but a description of scale, and verse 3 turns the machinery of nature into obedience: what looks like the regularity of fire and sun is read as fear, which is the archaic way of saying that nothing in the series is self-moving. Verse 4 states the deadline the Kena also states. The work is to be done here, before the body goes.

A raised thunderbolt, and what runs for fear of it a great terror, a raised thunderbolt the fire burns the sun burns Indra and the wind run death runs, the fifth not one of them moves itself The terror is a description of scale, not a threat held over anyone. What looks like the regularity of nature is read here as obedience.
Figure 42.24 — Verses 6.2 and 6.3. The regularity of nature read as obedience, with nothing in the series moving itself.
यथाऽऽदर्शे तथाऽऽत्मनि यथा स्वप्ने तथा पितृलोके ।
यथाऽप्सु परीव ददृशे तथा गन्धर्वलोके
छायातपयोरिव ब्रह्मलोके ॥ ५ ॥
इन्द्रियाणां पृथग्भावमुदयास्तमयौ च यत् ।
पृथगुत्पद्यमानानां मत्वा धीरो न शोचति ॥ ६ ॥
इन्द्रियेभ्यः परं मनो मनसः सत्त्वमुत्तमम् ।
सत्त्वादधि महानात्मा महतोऽव्यक्तमुत्तमम् ॥ ७ ॥
अव्यक्तात्तु परः पुरुषो व्यापकोऽलिङ्ग एव च ।
यं ज्ञात्वा मुच्यते जन्तुरमृतत्वं च गच्छति ॥ ८ ॥
yathā''darśe tathā''tmani yathā svapne tathā pitṛloke
yathā'psu parīva dadṛśe tathā gandharvaloke
chāyātapayoriva brahmaloke
6.6
indriyāṇāṃ pṛthagbhāvamudayāstamayau ca yat
pṛthagutpadyamānānāṃ matvā dhīro na śocati
6.7
indriyebhyaḥ paraṃ mano manasaḥ sattvamuttamam
sattvādadhi mahānātmā mahato'vyaktamuttamam
6.8
avyaktāttu paraḥ puruṣo vyāpako'liṅga eva ca
yaṃ jñātvā mucyate janturamṛtatvaṃ ca gacchati

6.5As in a mirror, so in the self; as in a dream, so in the world of the fathers; as seen in water, so in the world of the spirits; as shadow and light, so in the world of Brahman. Knowing the separate nature of the senses, and their rising and setting as things that come to be apart, the wise man does not grieve. Beyond the senses is the mind; beyond the mind is the best of what is; beyond that is the great Self; beyond the great is the unmanifest. Beyond the unmanifest is the Person, all-pervading and without a mark. Knowing him, a creature is freed and goes to the deathless.

Verse 5 grades the clarity of the vision available in four conditions, and it is the closest thing in the Upanishads to a scale of resolution: sharp as a reflection in a mirror, blurred as a dream, broken as a face seen in water, and in the world of Brahman as distinct as light is from shadow. Verses 7 and 8 repeat the ladder of the third chapter with one rung renamed.

What rises and sets, and what does not what is in question what it does what follows the body falls away so the work is to be done here the senses rise and set, each one apart knowing that, one does not grieve the one they are in neither rises nor sets beyond the great, and without a mark Verse 5 grades the clearness of the sight in four conditions, from a mirror to a dream. The deadline is stated twice in the collection: here, before the body goes, or not at all.
Figure 42.25 — Verses 6.4 to 6.6. Sorted by whether a thing has a rising and a setting.
न संदृशे तिष्ठति रूपमस्य
न चक्षुषा पश्यति कश्चनैनम् ।
हृदा मनीषा मनसाऽभिक्लृप्तो
य एतद्विदुरमृतास्ते भवन्ति ॥ ९ ॥
यदा पञ्चावतिष्ठन्ते ज्ञानानि मनसा सह ।
बुद्धिश्च न विचेष्टते तामाहुः परमां गतिम् ॥ १० ॥
तां योगमिति मन्यन्ते स्थिरामिन्द्रियधारणाम् ।
अप्रमत्तस्तदा भवति योगो हि प्रभवाप्ययौ ॥ ११ ॥
नैव वाचा न मनसा प्राप्तुं शक्यो न चक्षुषा ।
अस्तीति ब्रुवतोऽन्यत्र कथं तदुपलभ्यते ॥ १२ ॥
na saṃdṛśe tiṣṭhati rūpamasya
na cakṣuṣā paśyati kaścanainam
hṛdā manīṣā manasā'bhiklṛpto
ya etadviduramṛtāste bhavanti
6.10
yadā pañcāvatiṣṭhante jñānāni manasā saha
buddhiśca na viceṣṭate tāmāhuḥ paramāṃ gatim
6.11
tāṃ yogamiti manyante sthirāmindriyadhāraṇām
apramattastadā bhavati yogo hi prabhavāpyayau
6.12
naiva vācā na manasā prāptuṃ śakyo na cakṣuṣā
astīti bruvato'nyatra kathaṃ tadupalabhyate

6.9His form does not stand in the range of sight; nobody sees him with the eye. He is fashioned by the heart, by the understanding, by the mind. Those who know that become deathless. When the five knowings come to a stand together with the mind, and the intellect does not stir, they call that the highest way. This they hold to be yoga: the steady holding of the senses. Then one is not careless, for yoga comes and goes. Not by speech, not by mind, not by the eye can it be reached. How is it to be grasped, other than by saying that it is?

The definition in verse 11 is guarded in a way that most definitions of yoga are not: the steady holding of the senses is called yoga, and in the same breath the text says that yoga arises and passes away. What is being described is a state that has to be maintained and that will lapse. Verse 12 states the minimum any account of it can contain, and the next verse takes that minimum as sufficient.

अस्तीत्येवोपलब्धव्यस्तत्त्वभावेन चोभयोः ।
अस्तीत्येवोपलब्धस्य तत्त्वभावः प्रसीदति ॥ १३ ॥
यदा सर्वे प्रमुच्यन्ते कामा येऽस्य हृदि श्रिताः ।
अथ मर्त्योऽमृतो भवत्यत्र ब्रह्म समश्नुते ॥ १४ ॥
यदा सर्वे प्रभिद्यन्ते हृदयस्येह ग्रन्थयः ।
अथ मर्त्योऽमृतो भवत्येतावद्ध्यनुशासनम् ॥ १५ ॥
शतं चैका च हृदयस्य नाड्यस्तासां मूर्धानमभिनिःसृतैका ।
तयोर्ध्वमायन्नमृतत्वमेति
विष्वङ्ङन्या उत्क्रमणे भवन्ति ॥ १६ ॥
astītyevopalabdhavyastattvabhāvena cobhayoḥ
astītyevopalabdhasya tattvabhāvaḥ prasīdati
6.14
yadā sarve pramucyante kāmā ye'sya hṛdi śritāḥ
atha martyo'mṛto bhavatyatra brahma samaśnute
6.15
yadā sarve prabhidyante hṛdayasyeha granthayaḥ
atha martyo'mṛto bhavatyetāvaddhyanuśāsanam
6.16
śataṃ caikā ca hṛdayasya nāḍyastāsāṃ mūrdhānamabhiniḥsṛtaikā
tayordhvamāyannamṛtatvameti
viṣvaṅṅanyā utkramaṇe bhavanti

6.13It is to be grasped as being, and by its being what it is in both. To one who has grasped it as being, its real nature becomes clear. When all the desires that are lodged in the heart are let go, then a mortal becomes immortal and reaches Brahman here. When all the knots of the heart are cut here, then a mortal becomes immortal. This much is the teaching. A hundred and one are the channels of the heart. One of them runs out through the crown. Going up by it one reaches the deathless; the others lead out in all directions.

Verse 15 says etavat, this much, and stops, and what it stops after is a metaphor: the knots are the places where the sense of a separate self is tied to something. Verse 16 is the only piece of physiology in the Katha and the source of a long later literature; the Prashna and the Chandogya both repeat the count of a hundred and one channels.

A hundred and one channels, and one of them out through the crown to the deathless the heart led out sideways led out sideways the others go out in all directions, and come back The only piece of physiology in the Katha, and the start of a long later literature. The Prashna and the Chandogya both repeat the count of a hundred and one.
Figure 42.26 — Verse 6.16. One channel out of a hundred and one, and the direction that distinguishes it.
अङ्गुष्ठमात्रः पुरुषोऽन्तरात्मा
सदा जनानां हृदये संनिविष्टः ।
तं स्वाच्छरीरात्प्रवृहेन्मुञ्जादिवेषीकां धैर्येण ।
तं विद्याच्छुक्रममृतं तं विद्याच्छुक्रममृतमिति ॥ १७ ॥
मृत्युप्रोक्तां नचिकेतोऽथ लब्ध्वा
विद्यामेतां योगविधिं च कृत्स्नम् ।
ब्रह्मप्राप्तो विरजोऽभूद्विमृत्युरन्योऽप्येवं यो विदध्यात्ममेव ॥ १८ ॥
aṅguṣṭhamātraḥ puruṣo'ntarātmā
sadā janānāṃ hṛdaye saṃniviṣṭaḥ
taṃ svāccharīrātpravṛhenmuñjādiveṣīkāṃ dhairyeṇa
taṃ vidyācchukramamṛtaṃ taṃ vidyācchukramamṛtamiti
6.18
mṛtyuproktāṃ naciketo'tha labdhvā
vidyāmetāṃ yogavidhiṃ ca kṛtsnam
brahmaprāpto virajo'bhūdvimṛtyuranyo'pyevaṃ yo vidadhyātmameva

6.17The Person the size of a thumb, the inner self, is always seated in the heart of people. Draw it out from one's own body with steadiness, as one draws the reed from the munja grass. Know it to be the bright, the deathless; know it to be the bright, the deathless. Then Nachiketa, having received this knowledge told by Death and the whole rule of yoga, reached Brahman, free of dust and free of death — and so does anyone else who knows the Self in this way.

The munja reed comes out of its sheath whole and clean, and the comparison is about the manner of the operation rather than its violence: steadily, and without tearing what it is drawn from. The last verse returns the reader to the boy, which is the structural point Nagler makes about the Katha: the interview that was dropped when the teaching began is picked up and closed, and the closing clause extends the result to whoever repeats the procedure.

Drawn out as the reed is drawn from the grass the munja stalk the reed with steadiness the reed, whole and clean the sheath is not torn The comparison is about the manner, not the force: steadily, and without tearing. The last verse returns to the boy and extends the result to whoever repeats it.
Figure 42.27 — Verse 6.17. The operation is named by its manner: drawn out whole, and the sheath not torn.

Brihadaranyaka: the great forest

Brihad-aranyaka means of the great forest, and Nagler takes the name as a description of the reading. It is by far the longest of the Upanishads and the one most often quoted, and it sits inside the Shatapatha Brahmana of the White Yajur Veda, which makes it part of the largest ritual manual in the Vedic literature. Its six chapters are divided into forty-seven sections, and the sections are counted straight through here, so that the dialogue with Maitreyi, which editions number II.4, is section ten. Nothing in the text is arranged as an argument. Paths lead off in unpredictable directions, and what holds them together is one figure: Yajnavalkya, who wins a debate against the assembled learning of two kingdoms, answers a woman who has beaten him in public, and twice takes a thousand cows home.

One line from its third section has travelled further than anything else in the collection, because it is said at the beginning of ceremonies and because Easwaran prints it at the head of the Chandogya.

तदेतानि जपेदसतो मा सद् गमय
तमसो मा ज्योतिर्गमय मृत्योर्माऽमृतं गमयेति ।
tadetāni japedasato mā sad gamaya
tamaso mā jyotirgamaya mṛtyormā'mṛtaṃ gamayeti

3.28Let him repeat these: from the unreal lead me to the real, from darkness lead me to light, from death lead me to the deathless.

The context is a chant. A priest is about to sing, and these are the words he says under his breath first, and the text immediately explains them in its own flat way: the unreal is death, the real is the deathless, so the second half of each line says what the first half means. Nothing in the prayer asks for anything to be added. All three verbs ask to be taken from one place to another.

Three petitions, and the text's own gloss on them from to and the text explains the unreal the real the unreal is death darkness light the real is the deathless death the deathless so all three say one thing The words a priest says under his breath before he begins to sing. Nothing is asked to be added: all three verbs ask to be taken from one place to another.
Figure 42.28 — Section 3.28. Three petitions, and the gloss the text puts on them in the next breath.

What is loved in anything loved

The dialogue that follows is the one Nagler calls the most poignant discussion in the wisdom of any tradition. Yajnavalkya is leaving home for the third stage of life, and is settling his property.

मैत्रेयीति होवाच याज्ञवल्क्य उद्यास्यन्वा अरेऽहमस्मात्स्थानादस्मि
हन्त तेऽनया कात्यायन्याऽन्तं करवाणीति ॥ १
सा होवाच मैत्रेयी यन्नु म इयं भगोः सर्वा पृथिवी वित्तेन
पूर्णा स्यात् कथं तेनामृता स्यामिति । नेति होवाच याज्ञवल्क्यो
यथैवोपकरणवतां जीवितं तथैव ते जीवितं स्यादमृतत्वस्य
तु नाऽऽशाऽस्ति वित्तेनेति ॥ २
सा होवाच मैत्रेयी येनाहं नामृता स्यां किमहं तेन कुर्याम् । यदेव
भगवान्वेद तदेव मे ब्रूहीति ॥ ३
स होवाच याज्ञवल्क्यः प्रिया बतारे नः सती प्रियं भाषस एह्यास्स्व
व्याख्यास्यामि ते । व्याचक्षाणस्य तु मे निदिध्यासस्वेति ॥ ४
maitreyīti hovāca yājñavalkya udyāsyanvā are'hamasmātsthānādasmi
hanta te'nayā kātyāyanyā'ntaṃ karavāṇīti
10.2
sā hovāca maitreyī yannu ma iyaṃ bhagoḥ sarvā pṛthivī vittena
pūrṇā syāt kathaṃ tenāmṛtā syāmiti | neti hovāca yājñavalkyo
yathaivopakaraṇavatāṃ jīvitaṃ tathaiva te jīvitaṃ syādamṛtatvasya
tu nā''śā'sti vitteneti
10.3
sā hovāca maitreyī yenāhaṃ nāmṛtā syāṃ kimahaṃ tena kuryām | yadeva
bhagavānveda tadeva me brūhīti
10.4
sa hovāca yājñavalkyaḥ priyā batāre naḥ satī priyaṃ bhāṣasa ehyāssva
vyākhyāsyāmi te | vyācakṣāṇasya tu me nididhyāsasveti

10.1Maitreyi, said Yajnavalkya, I am going to go forth from this place. Come, let me make a settlement between you and Katyayani. Maitreyi said: if this whole earth filled with wealth were mine, would I be deathless by it? No, said Yajnavalkya: your life would be like the life of those who have means. Of deathlessness there is no hope through wealth. Maitreyi said: what should I do with a thing by which I do not become deathless? Tell me what you know. Yajnavalkya said: dear you have been to us, and dear is what you say. Come, sit; I will explain it to you. As I explain, meditate on it.

The exchange is a refusal and a correction in four sentences. Maitreyi is offered half of everything and asks one question about it, and the question is not whether the share is fair but whether the thing has the property she wants. Her husband agrees that it does not, and what he says next is the doctrine.

न वा अरे पत्युः कामाय पतिः प्रियो भवत्यात्मनस्तु कामाय पतिः प्रियो भवति ।
न वा अरे जायायै कामाय जाया प्रिया भवत्यात्मनस्तु कामाय जाया प्रिया भवति ।
न वा अरे सर्वस्य कामाय सर्वं प्रियं भवत्यात्मनस्तु कामाय सर्वं प्रियं भवति ।
आत्मा वा अरे द्रष्टव्यः श्रोतव्यो मन्तव्यो निदिध्यासितव्यः ।
ब्रह्म तं परादाद्योऽन्यत्रात्मनो ब्रह्म वेद ।
लोकास्तं परादुर्योऽन्यत्रात्मनो लोकान्वेद ।
इदं ब्रह्मेदं क्षत्रमिमे लोका इमे देवा इमानि भूतानीदं सर्वं यदयमात्मा ।
स यथा दुन्दुभेर्हन्यमानस्य न बाह्याञ्छब्दाञ्छक्नुयाद् ग्रहणाय
दुन्दुभेस्तु ग्रहणेन दुन्दुभ्याघातस्य वा शब्दो गृहीतः ॥ ७
na vā are patyuḥ kāmāya patiḥ priyo bhavatyātmanastu kāmāya patiḥ priyo bhavati
na vā are jāyāyai kāmāya jāyā priyā bhavatyātmanastu kāmāya jāyā priyā bhavati
na vā are sarvasya kāmāya sarvaṃ priyaṃ bhavatyātmanastu kāmāya sarvaṃ priyaṃ bhavati
ātmā vā are draṣṭavyaḥ śrotavyo mantavyo nididhyāsitavyaḥ
10.6
brahma taṃ parādādyo'nyatrātmano brahma veda
lokāstaṃ parāduryo'nyatrātmano lokānveda
idaṃ brahmedaṃ kṣatramime lokā ime devā imāni bhūtānīdaṃ sarvaṃ yadayamātmā
10.7
sa yathā dundubherhanyamānasya na bāhyāñchabdāñchaknuyād grahaṇāya
dundubhestu grahaṇena dundubhyāghātasya vā śabdo gṛhītaḥ

10.5Not for the husband's sake is the husband dear, but for the sake of the Self is the husband dear. Not for the wife's sake is the wife dear, but for the sake of the Self is the wife dear. Not for the sake of the all is the all dear, but for the sake of the Self is the all dear. The Self is to be seen, to be heard, to be reflected on, to be meditated on. Priesthood abandons the one who knows priesthood as other than the Self. Worlds abandon the one who knows the worlds as other than the Self. This priesthood, this nobility, these worlds, these gods, these beings, all this — it is the Self. As when a drum is being beaten one cannot catch the outward sounds, but by catching the drum, or the beater of the drum, the sound is caught.

The list in verse 5 runs through husband, wife, sons, wealth, priesthood, nobility, the worlds, the gods, all beings and finally everything, and the same sentence is repeated each time with one word changed. The word Easwaran translates as for the sake of is kamaya, for love of; what the sentence denies is that anything is loved in its own right, and what it asserts is that the thing actually loved in every case is one and the same. The four verbs at the end — seen, heard, reflected on, meditated on — became the standard programme of Vedanta, and the last of them, nididhyasana, is the word for meditation the whole collection rests on.

Nothing is loved for its own sake the husband the wife wealth, the worlds the gods, all beings loved for the Self the same one every time the knower one end of every knowing never the other end Each item is shown to be loved for something else; the series stops at a term that is not an item. By what should one know the knower — the question is a consequence, not a riddle.
Figure 42.29 — Yajnavalkya's argument to Maitreyi. Each thing said to be loved is shown to be loved for something else, and the series has one term at which the question stops.
स यथा सर्वासामपां समुद्र एकायनम् ।
एवं सर्वेषां स्पर्शानां त्वगेकायनम् ।
एवं सर्वासां विद्यानां हृदयमेकायनम् ।
स यथा सैन्धवखिल्य उदके प्रास्त उदकमेवानुविलीयेत
न हास्योद्ग्रहणाय स्याद् यतो यतस्त्वाददीत लवणमेव ।
एवं वा अर इदं महद् भूतमनन्तमपारं विज्ञानघन एव ।
सा होवाच मैत्रेय्यत्रैव मा भगवानमूमुहद् न प्रेत्य सञ्ज्ञाऽस्तीति
स होवाच न वा अरेऽहं मोहं ब्रवीम्यलं वा अर इदं विज्ञानाय ॥ १३
sa yathā sarvāsāmapāṃ samudra ekāyanam
evaṃ sarveṣāṃ sparśānāṃ tvagekāyanam
evaṃ sarvāsāṃ vidyānāṃ hṛdayamekāyanam
10.12
sa yathā saindhavakhilya udake prāsta udakamevānuvilīyeta
na hāsyodgrahaṇāya syād yato yatastvādadīta lavaṇameva
evaṃ vā ara idaṃ mahad bhūtamanantamapāraṃ vijñānaghana eva
10.13
sā hovāca maitreyyatraiva mā bhagavānamūmuhad na pretya sañjñā'stīti
sa hovāca na vā are'haṃ mohaṃ bravīmyalaṃ vā ara idaṃ vijñānāya

10.11As the sea is the one meeting place of all waters; as the skin is the one meeting place of all touches; as the heart is the one meeting place of all kinds of knowledge. As a lump of salt thrown into water dissolves into the water, and there is no picking it up again, but wherever one takes it up it is salt — so this great being is endless, unlimited, a single mass of knowing. Maitreyi said: here you have bewildered me. Yajnavalkya said: I am saying nothing bewildering. This is enough for knowing.

The salt of section ten is not the salt of the Chandogya, though the two are often confused. In the Chandogya the point is that what cannot be seen can be tasted everywhere. Here the point is the dissolving: what goes into the water does not survive as a thing that could be lifted out, and Maitreyi understands the implication at once and objects to it, because what she has just been told is that there is no consciousness after death in the sense she meant. The reply is that nothing has been taken away.

यत्र हि द्वैतमिव भवति तदितर इतरं पश्यति तदितर इतरं विजानाति ।
यत्र वा अस्य सर्वमात्मैवाभूत् तत्केन कं पश्येत् तत्केन कं विजानीयात् ।
येनेदं सर्वं विजानाति तं केन विजानीयाद् विज्ञातारमरे केन विजानीयादिति ।
yatra hi dvaitamiva bhavati taditara itaraṃ paśyati taditara itaraṃ vijānāti
yatra vā asya sarvamātmaivābhūt tatkena kaṃ paśyet tatkena kaṃ vijānīyāt
yenedaṃ sarvaṃ vijānāti taṃ kena vijānīyād vijñātāramare kena vijānīyāditi

10.14Where there is duality, as it were, there one sees another, one knows another. But where everything has become the Self, by what should one see whom, by what should one know whom? By what should one know that by which all this is known — by what should one know the knower?

The last clause is the most quoted sentence in the Upanishads and the hardest to answer. It is not a mystery offered for contemplation but a consequence: knowing has a structure with two ends, and the thing in question occupies one of them permanently. The same sentence closes the same dialogue when it is told a second time in the fourth chapter, and there it ends with the line that this much is deathlessness.

एतावदरे खल्वमृतत्वमिति होक्त्वा याज्ञवल्क्यो विजहार ।
etāvadare khalvamṛtatvamiti hoktvā yājñavalkyo vijahāra

26.15This much, then, is deathlessness. Having said that, Yajnavalkya went away.

The honey

The section that follows the dialogue is the madhu-vidya, the honey doctrine, and it is the most systematic passage in the text. It is built out of one sentence repeated fourteen times.

इयं पृथिवी सर्वेषां भूतानां मध्वस्यै पृथिव्यै सर्वाणि भूतानि मधु ।
यश्चायमस्यां पृथिव्यां तेजोमयोऽमृतमयः पुरुषः ।
यश्चायमध्यात्मं शारीरस्तेजोमयोऽमृतमयः पुरुषोऽयमेव सः ।
यो योऽयमात्मेदममृतमिदं ब्रह्मेदं सर्वम् ।
स वा अयमात्मा सर्वेषां भूतानामधिपतिः सर्वेषां भूतानां राजा ।
तद्यथा रथनाभौ च रथनेमौ चाराः सर्वे समर्पिताः ।
एवमेवास्मिन्नात्मनि सर्वाणि भूतानि सर्वे देवाः सर्वे लोकाः सर्वे प्राणाः समर्पिताः ।
रूपंरूपं प्रतिरूपो बभूव तदस्य रूपं प्रतिचक्षणाय ।
इन्द्रो मायाभिः पुरुरूप ईयते युक्ता ह्यस्य हरयः शता दशेति ।
तदेतद्ब्रह्मापूर्वमनपरमनन्तरमबाह्यमयमात्मा ब्रह्म सर्वानुभूरित्यनुशासनम् ।
iyaṃ pṛthivī sarveṣāṃ bhūtānāṃ madhvasyai pṛthivyai sarvāṇi bhūtāni madhu
yaścāyamasyāṃ pṛthivyāṃ tejomayo'mṛtamayaḥ puruṣaḥ
yaścāyamadhyātmaṃ śārīrastejomayo'mṛtamayaḥ puruṣo'yameva saḥ
yo yo'yamātmedamamṛtamidaṃ brahmedaṃ sarvam
11.15
sa vā ayamātmā sarveṣāṃ bhūtānāmadhipatiḥ sarveṣāṃ bhūtānāṃ rājā
tadyathā rathanābhau ca rathanemau cārāḥ sarve samarpitāḥ
evamevāsminnātmani sarvāṇi bhūtāni sarve devāḥ sarve lokāḥ sarve prāṇāḥ samarpitāḥ
11.19
rūpaṃrūpaṃ pratirūpo babhūva tadasya rūpaṃ praticakṣaṇāya
indro māyābhiḥ pururūpa īyate yuktā hyasya harayaḥ śatā daśeti
tadetadbrahmāpūrvamanaparamanantaramabāhyamayamātmā brahma sarvānubhūrityanuśāsanam

11.1This earth is the honey of all beings, and all beings are the honey of this earth. The bright and deathless person in this earth, and the bright and deathless person in the body — he is the same. This is the Self, the deathless, Brahman, the all. This Self is the overlord of all beings, the king of all beings. As all the spokes are fixed in the hub and the rim of a wheel, so all beings, all gods, all worlds, all breaths are fixed in this Self. Shape by shape he became the counter-shape; that shape of his is for the seeing. Indra by his powers goes in many shapes; his horses are yoked, a hundred and ten. He is Brahman, with nothing before, nothing after, nothing inside, nothing outside.

The honey: one sentence, fourteen times outside in the body earth the body fire speech the sun the eye and eleven more and eleven more the same person bright, deathless, in both this is the Self, the all Each is called the honey of all beings, and all beings its honey, before the pair is joined. What many flowers give becomes one substance that belongs to no flower.
Figure 42.30 — The honey doctrine. Each pair names a thing outside and the matching thing in the body, and the claim is made twice in each direction before it is made once about the Self.

Fourteen times the text names something — earth, water, fire, air, sun, space, moon, lightning, thunder, ether, law, truth, humanity, the Self — and says that it is the honey of all beings and that all beings are its honey, and then locates the same bright person in the thing and in the corresponding part of the body. The word madhu is honey in the plain sense and the figure is the one from beekeeping: what many flowers give becomes one substance, and the substance belongs to no flower. The doctrine is attributed to Dadhyanch, who is said to have taught it to the Ashvins at the cost of his head.

Neti neti

The formula that the tradition treats as the Upanishads' method appears twice and both times as a conclusion rather than a beginning.

अथात आदेशो नेति नेति न ह्येतस्मादिति नेत्यन्यत् परमस्ति ।
अथ नामधेयं सत्यस्य सत्यमिति ।
स एष नेति नेत्यात्माऽगृह्यो न हि गृह्यते ।
अशीर्यो न हि शीर्यतेऽसङ्गो न हि सज्यतेऽसितो न व्यथते न रिष्यति ।
athāta ādeśo neti neti na hyetasmāditi netyanyat paramasti
atha nāmadheyaṃ satyasya satyamiti
21.26
sa eṣa neti netyātmā'gṛhyo na hi gṛhyate
aśīryo na hi śīryate'saṅgo na hi sajyate'sito na vyathate na riṣyati

9.6Then the instruction: not this, not this. There is nothing higher than this, than to say: it is not so. Then the name: the truth of the truth. That Self is not this, not this. It is ungraspable, for it is not grasped; indestructible, for it is not destroyed; unattached, for it does not attach; unbound, it does not tremble and is not harmed.

Not so, not so like a saffron robe, like wool like a flame, like a white lotus like a flash of lightning not so, not so said twice not to be grasped not to be destroyed not attached, not bound what is offered what is done with it what survives The first denial refuses the description just given; the second refuses the refusal as a description. Every property left over is itself a negative, which is why the list can stop.
Figure 42.31 — How the denial is used. Each description is offered, accepted as far as it goes, and then refused, and the six properties that remain are all of them negative.

Neti neti is two words, na iti, not so, said twice, and the doubling is not emphasis. The first denial refuses the description just given; the second refuses the refusal as a description. The passage in section nine has just offered a list of colours for the appearance of the person — a saffron robe, white wool, a scarlet beetle, a flame, a white lotus, a sudden flash of lightning — and it is those that the denial cancels. The list of negative properties in section twenty-one is the set that survives every such cancellation, and it is short: not graspable, not destructible, not attached, not bound, not shaken, not injured.

Gargi, and what holds the worlds

The third chapter is a public contest. King Janaka of Videha pens a thousand cows with ten gold coins tied between the horns of each and offers them to the most learned man present; Yajnavalkya tells his pupil to drive them home before the debate has begun, and then has to earn them. The questioners come in turn, and two of them are remembered. The first is Gargi, daughter of Vachaknu.

अथ हैनं गार्गी वाचक्नवी पप्रच्छ ।
यदिदं सर्वमप्स्वोतं च प्रोतं च कस्मिन्नु खल्वाप ओताश्च प्रोताश्चेति ।
वायौ गार्गीति । कस्मिन्नु खलु वायुरोतश्च प्रोतश्चेति ।
अन्तरिक्षलोकेषु गार्गीति ।
atha hainaṃ gārgī vācaknavī papraccha
yadidaṃ sarvamapsvotaṃ ca protaṃ ca kasminnu khalvāpa otāśca protāśceti
vāyau gārgīti | kasminnu khalu vāyurotaśca protaśceti
antarikṣalokeṣu gārgīti

18.1Then Gargi Vachaknavi asked him: since all this is woven, warp and woof, on water, on what then is water woven, warp and woof? On air, Gargi. And on what is air woven? On the worlds of the middle air, Gargi.

She continues upward through the worlds of the gandharvas, the sun, the moon, the stars, the gods, Indra, Prajapati and Brahma, and at the last step Yajnavalkya stops her with a threat that is also a rule of method: do not ask too much, Gargi, or your head will fall off; you are asking too much about a divinity about which one must not ask too much. She sits down. The exchange with Uddalaka that follows introduces the phrase the later tradition made a doctrine of, the inner controller.

यः पृथिव्यां तिष्ठन्पृथिव्या अन्तरो यं पृथिवी न वेद
यस्य पृथिवी शरीरं यः पृथिवीमन्तरो यमयत्येष त
आत्माऽन्तर्याम्यमृतः ॥ ३
एष त आत्माऽन्तर्याम्यमृतोऽदृष्टो द्रष्टाऽश्रुतः श्रोताऽमतो मन्ताऽविज्ञतो विज्ञाता ।
नान्योऽतोऽस्ति द्रष्टा नान्योऽतोऽस्ति श्रोता नान्योऽतोऽस्ति मन्ता नान्योऽतोऽस्ति विज्ञाता ।
yaḥ pṛthivyāṃ tiṣṭhanpṛthivyā antaro yaṃ pṛthivī na veda
yasya pṛthivī śarīraṃ yaḥ pṛthivīmantaro yamayatyeṣa ta
ātmā'ntaryāmyamṛtaḥ
19.23
eṣa ta ātmā'ntaryāmyamṛto'dṛṣṭo draṣṭā'śrutaḥ śrotā'mato mantā'vijñato vijñātā
nānyo'to'sti draṣṭā nānyo'to'sti śrotā nānyo'to'sti mantā nānyo'to'sti vijñātā

19.3He who dwells in the earth, who is within the earth, whom the earth does not know, whose body the earth is, who controls the earth from within — he is your Self, the inner controller, the deathless. He is your Self, the inner controller, the deathless: unseen, he sees; unheard, he hears; unthought, he thinks; unknown, he knows. There is no other seer than he, no other hearer, no other thinker, no other knower.

The formula of section nineteen is repeated twenty-three times for twenty-three things, from the earth to the semen, and each time with the same four clauses: he is in it, it does not know him, it is his body, he controls it from within. The last sentence supplies the reason the list can be closed. Whatever else is in the series, the one who runs it is not an item that could be added to the series, because the position of knower is already occupied.

Four clauses, said over twenty-three times he dwells in it it does not know him its body is his he controls it from within there is no other seer, hearer, thinker or knower than he The list runs from the earth to the semen, and the four clauses never change. The last sentence is why it can be closed: the position of knower is already taken.
Figure 42.32 — Section 19. The same four clauses for twenty-three things, and the sentence that lets the list be closed.

Then Gargi stands up a second time and says she has two questions, and that if he answers them nobody will beat him in argument about Brahman.

सा होवाच यदूर्ध्वं याज्ञवल्क्य दिवो यदवाक्पृथिव्या यदन्तरा
द्यावापृथिवी इमे यद्भूतं च भवच्च भविष्यच्चेत्याचक्षते
कस्मिंस्तदोतं च प्रोतं चेति ॥ ३
स होवाच यदूर्ध्वं गार्गि दिवो यदवाक्पृथिव्या यदन्तरा
द्यावापृथिवी इमे यद्भूतं च भवच्च भविष्यच्चेत्याचक्षत
आकाशे तदोतं च प्रोतं चेति ॥ ४
स होवाच यदूर्ध्वं गार्गि दिवो यदवाक्पृथिव्या यदन्तरा
द्यावापृथिवी इमे यद्भूतं च भवच्च भविष्यच्चेत्याचक्षत
आकाश एव तदोतं च प्रोतं चेति । कस्मिन्नु खल्वाकाश ओतश्च
प्रोतश्चेति ॥ ७
sā hovāca yadūrdhvaṃ yājñavalkya divo yadavākpṛthivyā yadantarā
dyāvāpṛthivī ime yadbhūtaṃ ca bhavacca bhaviṣyaccetyācakṣate
kasmiṃstadotaṃ ca protaṃ ceti
20.4
sa hovāca yadūrdhvaṃ gārgi divo yadavākpṛthivyā yadantarā
dyāvāpṛthivī ime yadbhūtaṃ ca bhavacca bhaviṣyaccetyācakṣata
ākāśe tadotaṃ ca protaṃ ceti
20.7
sa hovāca yadūrdhvaṃ gārgi divo yadavākpṛthivyā yadantarā
dyāvāpṛthivī ime yadbhūtaṃ ca bhavacca bhaviṣyaccetyācakṣata
ākāśa eva tadotaṃ ca protaṃ ceti | kasminnu khalvākāśa otaśca
protaśceti

20.3She said: what is above the sky, what is below the earth, what is between these two, what men call the past and the present and the future — on what is that woven, warp and woof? He said: on space, Gargi. He said: on space, Gargi, that is woven, warp and woof. And on what is space woven, warp and woof?

Two rounds of one question first round: climbing water, then air the middle air, the sun the moon, the stars, the gods stopped here do not ask too much second round: one step what is above, below and between, past and future woven on space and on what is space woven? the imperishable described only by what it is not Climbing the ladder of worlds gets a warning; asking what the ladder stands on gets an answer. Gargi then tells the assembly that none of them will win an argument with this man.
Figure 42.33 — Gargi's two rounds. The first climbs the ladder of worlds and is stopped; the second takes one step and puts the question to the thing the ladder was standing on.

The second question is the first question asked once. Gargi has learned from being stopped, and instead of climbing she goes straight to the term that answers everything else and asks what answers that. The reply is the longest single description in the text and it is made entirely of negatives.

स होवाचैतद्वै तदक्षरं गार्गि ब्राह्मणा अभिवदन्ति ।
अस्थूलमनण्वह्रस्वमदीर्घमलोहितमस्नेहमच्छायमतमः ।
अवाय्वनाकाशमसङ्गमचक्षुष्कमश्रोत्रमवागमनः ।
न तदश्नाति किं चन न तदश्नाति कश्चन ।
एतस्य वा अक्षरस्य प्रशासने गार्गि सूर्याचन्द्रमसौ विधृतौ तिष्ठतः ।
एतस्य वा अक्षरस्य प्रशासने गार्गि द्यावापृथिव्यौ विधृते तिष्ठतः ।
एतस्य वा अक्षरस्य प्रशासने गार्गि प्राच्योऽन्या नद्यः स्यन्दन्ते ।
यो वा एतदक्षरं गार्ग्यविदित्वास्मिंल्लोके जुहोति यजते तपस्तप्यते बहूनि वर्षसहस्राणि ।
अन्तवदेवास्य तद्भवति ।
यो वा एतदक्षरं गार्ग्यविदित्वास्माल्लोकात्प्रैति स कृपणः ।
तद्वा एतदक्षरं गार्ग्यदृष्टं द्रष्टृ अश्रुतं श्रोतृ अमतं मन्तृ अविज्ञातं विज्ञातृ ।
नान्यदतोऽस्ति द्रष्टृ नान्यदतोऽस्ति श्रोतृ नान्यदतोऽस्ति मन्तृ नान्यदतोऽस्ति विज्ञातृ ।
एतस्मिन्नु खल्वक्षरे गार्ग्याकाश ओतश्च प्रोतश्चेति ।
सा होवाच ब्राह्मणा भगवन्तस्तदेव बहु मन्येध्वं यदस्मान्नमस्कारेण
मुच्येध्वं न वै जातु युष्माकमिमं कश्चिद्ब्रह्मोद्यं जेतेति ततो ह
वाचक्नव्युपरराम ॥ १२
sa hovācaitadvai tadakṣaraṃ gārgi brāhmaṇā abhivadanti
asthūlamanaṇvahrasvamadīrghamalohitamasnehamacchāyamatamaḥ
avāyvanākāśamasaṅgamacakṣuṣkamaśrotramavāgamanaḥ
na tadaśnāti kiṃ cana na tadaśnāti kaścana
20.9
etasya vā akṣarasya praśāsane gārgi sūryācandramasau vidhṛtau tiṣṭhataḥ
etasya vā akṣarasya praśāsane gārgi dyāvāpṛthivyau vidhṛte tiṣṭhataḥ
etasya vā akṣarasya praśāsane gārgi prācyo'nyā nadyaḥ syandante
20.10
yo vā etadakṣaraṃ gārgyaviditvāsmiṃlloke juhoti yajate tapastapyate bahūni varṣasahasrāṇi
antavadevāsya tadbhavati
yo vā etadakṣaraṃ gārgyaviditvāsmāllokātpraiti sa kṛpaṇaḥ
20.11
tadvā etadakṣaraṃ gārgyadṛṣṭaṃ draṣṭṛ aśrutaṃ śrotṛ amataṃ mantṛ avijñātaṃ vijñātṛ
nānyadato'sti draṣṭṛ nānyadato'sti śrotṛ nānyadato'sti mantṛ nānyadato'sti vijñātṛ
etasminnu khalvakṣare gārgyākāśa otaśca protaśceti
20.12
sā hovāca brāhmaṇā bhagavantastadeva bahu manyedhvaṃ yadasmānnamaskāreṇa
mucyedhvaṃ na vai jātu yuṣmākamimaṃ kaścidbrahmodyaṃ jeteti tato ha
vācaknavyupararāma

20.8He said: that, Gargi, is what the knowers of Brahman call the imperishable. Not coarse, not fine, not short, not long, not red, not moist, without shadow, without darkness, without air, without space, unattached, without eyes, without ears, without speech, without mind. It eats nothing, and nothing eats it. At the command of this imperishable, Gargi, sun and moon stand held apart. At the command of this imperishable, heaven and earth stand held apart. At the command of this imperishable, some rivers run east from the snowy mountains. Whoever, Gargi, without knowing this imperishable, offers and sacrifices and performs austerities in this world for many thousands of years — what he gets has an end. Whoever, Gargi, departs from this world without knowing this imperishable is wretched. That imperishable, Gargi, is unseen but sees, unheard but hears, unthought but thinks, unknown but knows. There is no other seer than it, no other hearer, no other thinker, no other knower. On this imperishable, Gargi, space is woven, warp and woof. She said: revered brahmins, count yourselves fortunate if you get away from this man with a bow. None of you will beat him in an argument about Brahman. Then Gargi sat down.

The negatives in verse 8 are not a refusal to answer. Each one removes a property that something woven on space would have to have, and the two clauses about eating remove the last relation left, since anything inside a chain of dependence either consumes something or is consumed. Verse 9 is the positive half and it is about regularity: what holds sun and moon apart and sends rivers in fixed directions is the same thing the negatives were about. Gargi's closing speech concedes for the whole assembly, and she does it by naming the prize, which is to get out with one's reputation.

The states of consciousness

The fourth chapter is a private conversation between Yajnavalkya and Janaka, and Yajnavalkya arrives resolved to say nothing and is trapped by a promise. It is the fullest account of waking, dream and sleep in the collection, and everything the later tradition says about the three states begins here.

याज्ञवल्क्य किञ्ज्योतिरयं पुरुष इत्यादित्यज्योतिः सम्राड् इति
होवाचाऽऽदित्येनैवायं ज्योतिषाऽऽस्ते पल्ययते कर्म कुरुते
विपल्येतीत्येवमेवैतद् याज्ञवल्क्य ॥ २
अस्तमित आदित्ये याज्ञवल्क्य चन्द्रमस्यस्तमिते शान्तेऽग्नौ शान्तायां
वाचि किञ्ज्योतिरेवायं पुरुष इत्यात्मैवास्य ज्योतिर्भवत्यात्मनैवायं
ज्योतिषाऽऽस्ते पल्ययते कर्म कुरुते विपल्येतीति ॥ ६
yājñavalkya kiñjyotirayaṃ puruṣa ityādityajyotiḥ samrāḍ iti
hovācā''dityenaivāyaṃ jyotiṣā''ste palyayate karma kurute
vipalyetītyevamevaitad yājñavalkya
24.6
astamita āditye yājñavalkya candramasyastamite śānte'gnau śāntāyāṃ
vāci kiñjyotirevāyaṃ puruṣa ityātmaivāsya jyotirbhavatyātmanaivāyaṃ
jyotiṣā''ste palyayate karma kurute vipalyetīti

24.2Yajnavalkya, what light does this person have? The light of the sun, your majesty, he said; by the light of the sun he sits, moves about, does his work, and comes back. When the sun has set, Yajnavalkya, and the moon has set, and the fire has gone out, and speech is stilled, what light does this person have? The Self is his light; by the light of the Self he sits, moves about, does his work, and comes back.

The question is answered four times before it is answered properly, and the order is a subtraction. Take away the sun and there is the moon; take away the moon and there is fire; take away fire and there is speech, by which a man in the dark can still find his way to the person speaking; take away speech and something is still working. What the sequence establishes is not that the Self is a fifth lamp but that the series of lamps has a floor.

Take away one lamp and name the next what is taken away what is left to see by how far it goes nothing yet the sun he sits, moves, works, comes back the sun has set the moon the same answer, one lamp down the moon has set the fire and again, one lamp down the fire is out speech in the dark one still finds the speaker speech is stilled the Self and something is still working The question is answered four times before it is answered properly. What the subtraction shows is not a fifth lamp but that the series has a floor.
Figure 42.34 — Section 24.2 to 24.6. A subtraction rather than a list: each lamp is removed and the next named.
कतम आत्मेति । योऽयं विज्ञानमयः प्राणेषु हृद्यन्तर्ज्योतिः पुरुषः ।
स समानः सन्नुभौ लोकावनुसञ्चरति । ध्यायतीव लेलायतीव ।
स हि स्वप्नो भूत्वेमं लोकमतिक्रामति मृत्यो रूपाणि ।
तस्य वा एतस्य पुरुषस्य द्वे एव स्थाने भवत इदं च परलोकस्थानं च ।
सन्ध्यं तृतीयं स्वप्नस्थानम् ।
स यत्र प्रस्वपित्यस्य लोकस्य सर्वावतो मात्रामपादाय स्वयं विहत्य स्वयं निर्माय ।
स्वेन भासा स्वेन ज्योतिषा प्रस्वपित्यत्रायं पुरुषः स्वयं ज्योतिर्भवति ।
katama ātmeti | yo'yaṃ vijñānamayaḥ prāṇeṣu hṛdyantarjyotiḥ puruṣaḥ
sa samānaḥ sannubhau lokāvanusañcarati | dhyāyatīva lelāyatīva
sa hi svapno bhūtvemaṃ lokamatikrāmati mṛtyo rūpāṇi
24.9
tasya vā etasya puruṣasya dve eva sthāne bhavata idaṃ ca paralokasthānaṃ ca
sandhyaṃ tṛtīyaṃ svapnasthānam
sa yatra prasvapityasya lokasya sarvāvato mātrāmapādāya svayaṃ vihatya svayaṃ nirmāya
svena bhāsā svena jyotiṣā prasvapityatrāyaṃ puruṣaḥ svayaṃ jyotirbhavati

24.7Which is the Self? The person here made of knowing, among the breaths, the light within the heart. Remaining the same, he moves through both worlds. He seems to think; he seems to move about. Becoming a dream, he passes beyond this world, beyond the forms of death. There are just two places for this person, this one and the place of the other world; the third, the joining place, is the place of dream. When he goes to sleep, he takes the material of this all-embracing world, strikes it down himself, builds it himself, and sleeps by his own brightness, by his own light. Here this person is self-illumined.

The phrase svayam jyotih, self-illumined, is the centre of the chapter. In waking the light comes from outside and in dream it does not, and the whole argument turns on that one observation, which anybody can make. Dreaming is used not because it is interesting but because it is the one ordinary state in which the equipment produces its own objects and its own light.

न तत्र रथा न रथयोगा न पन्थानो भवन्ति ।
अथ रथान् रथयोगान् पथः सृजते ।
न तत्र वेशान्ताः पुष्करिण्यः स्रवन्त्यो भवन्त्यथ वेशान्तान् पुष्करिणीः स्रवन्तीः सृजते ।
स हि कर्ता ।
तदेते श्लोका भवन्ति स्वप्नेन शारीरमभिप्रहत्या सुप्तः
सुप्तानभिचाकशीति । शुक्रमादाय पुनरैति स्थानं हिरण्मयः
पुरुष एकहंसः ॥ ११
स्वप्नान्त उच्चावचमीयमानो रूपाणि देवः कुरुते बहूनि । उतेव स्त्रीभिः
सह मोदमानो जक्षदुतेवापि भयानि पश्यन् ॥ १३
na tatra rathā na rathayogā na panthāno bhavanti
atha rathān rathayogān pathaḥ sṛjate
na tatra veśāntāḥ puṣkariṇyaḥ sravantyo bhavantyatha veśāntān puṣkariṇīḥ sravantīḥ sṛjate
sa hi kartā
24.11
tadete ślokā bhavanti svapnena śārīramabhiprahatyā suptaḥ
suptānabhicākaśīti | śukramādāya punaraiti sthānaṃ hiraṇmayaḥ
puruṣa ekahaṃsaḥ
24.13
svapnānta uccāvacamīyamāno rūpāṇi devaḥ kurute bahūni | uteva strībhiḥ
saha modamāno jakṣadutevāpi bhayāni paśyan

24.10There are no chariots there, no teams, no roads; he emits chariots, teams and roads. There are no pools there, no ponds, no rivers; he emits pools, ponds and rivers. For he is the maker. On this there are verses. Striking down the body in sleep, himself sleepless, he looks down on the sleeping. Taking the light he comes back again to his place, the golden person, the solitary swan. Moving up and down in the dream, the god makes many shapes: now taking pleasure with women, now laughing, now seeing terrible things.

Where the light comes from standing place what it is made of the light waking, this world objects already there found, not made sun, moon, fire dream, the joining place sees into both chariots, roads, ponds emitted, for he is the maker its own the other world reached, not visited works and their fruit not said deep sleep nothing at all no objects to light The argument turns on the one row anybody can check: in dream the light is not borrowed.
Figure 42.35 — The account of the fourth chapter. Two standing places, a third between them, and one condition in which nothing is made at all; what changes down the column is where the light comes from.

The inventory in verse 10 is the earliest list of its kind, and the word for what the dreamer does with chariots and roads is srijate, he emits or pours out. The verses in 11 and 13 are older than the prose around them, and the swan of verse 11 is the same bird the tradition puns on: hamsa, swan, read backwards is so'ham, I am he.

तद्यथा महामत्स्य उभे कूलेऽनुसञ्चरति पूर्वं चापरं च ।
एवमेवायं पुरुष एतावुभावन्तावनुसञ्चरति स्वप्नान्तं च बुद्धान्तं च ।
तद्यथास्मिन्नाकाशे श्येनो वा सुपर्णो वा विपरिपत्य श्रान्तः संहत्य पक्षौ संलयायैव ध्रियते ।
एवमेवायं पुरुष एतस्मा अन्ताय धावति ।
यत्र सुप्तो न कं चन कामं कामयते न कं चन स्वप्नं पश्यति ।
तद्वा अस्यैतदतिच्छन्दा अपहतपाप्माभयं रूपम् ।
तद्यथा प्रियया स्त्रिया सम्परिष्वक्तो न बाह्यं किं चन वेद नान्तरम् ।
एवमेवायं पुरुषः प्राज्ञेनात्मना सम्परिष्वक्तो न बाह्यं किं चन वेद नान्तरम् ।
अत्र पिताऽपिता भवति माताऽमाता लोका अलोका देवा अदेवा वेदा अवेदाः ।
अत्र स्तेनोऽस्तेनो भवति चाण्डालोऽचण्डालः श्रमणोऽश्रमणस्तापसोऽतापसः ।
अनन्वागतं पुण्येनानन्वागतं पापेन तीर्णो हि तदा सर्वाञ्छोकान् हृदयस्य भवति ।
tadyathā mahāmatsya ubhe kūle'nusañcarati pūrvaṃ cāparaṃ ca
evamevāyaṃ puruṣa etāvubhāvantāvanusañcarati svapnāntaṃ ca buddhāntaṃ ca
24.19
tadyathāsminnākāśe śyeno vā suparṇo vā viparipatya śrāntaḥ saṃhatya pakṣau saṃlayāyaiva dhriyate
evamevāyaṃ puruṣa etasmā antāya dhāvati
yatra supto na kaṃ cana kāmaṃ kāmayate na kaṃ cana svapnaṃ paśyati
24.21
tadvā asyaitadaticchandā apahatapāpmābhayaṃ rūpam
tadyathā priyayā striyā sampariṣvakto na bāhyaṃ kiṃ cana veda nāntaram
evamevāyaṃ puruṣaḥ prājñenātmanā sampariṣvakto na bāhyaṃ kiṃ cana veda nāntaram
24.22
atra pitā'pitā bhavati mātā'mātā lokā alokā devā adevā vedā avedāḥ
atra steno'steno bhavati cāṇḍālo'caṇḍālaḥ śramaṇo'śramaṇastāpaso'tāpasaḥ
ananvāgataṃ puṇyenānanvāgataṃ pāpena tīrṇo hi tadā sarvāñchokān hṛdayasya bhavati

24.18As a great fish swims along both banks, the near one and the far one, so this person moves along both these boundaries, the boundary of dream and the boundary of waking. As a hawk or an eagle, having flown about in the sky and being tired, folds its wings and settles down to rest, so this person runs to that condition where, asleep, he desires no desire and sees no dream. That form of his is beyond desire, free from evil, without fear. As a man in the arms of the woman he loves knows nothing of what is outside or inside, so this person, in the arms of the Self that knows, knows nothing of what is outside or inside. There a father is not a father, a mother not a mother, worlds not worlds, gods not gods, the Vedas not the Vedas. There a thief is not a thief, an outcaste not an outcaste, a wanderer not a wanderer, an ascetic not an ascetic. He is not followed by good and not followed by evil; he has then crossed over all the sorrows of the heart.

The fish is the image Nagler singles out, and the point of it is command rather than motion: the fish is at home in the whole river and is not a resident of either bank. The eagle is the opposite motion, and what returns it to the nest is exhaustion. The third image is the one the text calls its boldest, and the list that follows in verse 22 is what it costs. Every category a person can be described by is suspended, including the ones a society most wants kept — the thief, the outcaste, the killer of an unborn child — and the sentence does not say they are forgiven.

Two images for one movement between states the near bank: waking the far bank: dream the great fish at home in the whole river and a resident of neither bank a hawk, having flown about in the sky folds its wings and settles desiring no desire, seeing no dream tired what sends it back is exhaustion, which is why sleep is not the goal One image is about command of the whole range; the other is about running out of it.
Figure 42.36 — Sections 24.18 and 24.19. One image is about command of the whole range and the other about running out of it.
यत्र वा अन्यदिव स्यात् तत्रान्योऽन्यत्पश्येदन्योऽन्यज्जिघ्रेत् ।
अन्योऽन्यद्वदेदन्योऽन्यन्मन्वीतान्योऽन्यद्विजानीयात् ।
सलिल एको द्रष्टाद्वैतो भवत्येष ब्रह्मलोकः सम्राडिति ।
एषास्य परमा गतिरेषास्य परमा सम्पदेषोऽस्य परमो लोक एषोऽस्य परम आनन्दः ।
एतस्यैवानन्दस्यान्यानि भूतानि मात्रामुपजीवन्ति ।
yatra vā anyadiva syāt tatrānyo'nyatpaśyedanyo'nyajjighret
anyo'nyadvadedanyo'nyanmanvītānyo'nyadvijānīyāt
24.32
salila eko draṣṭādvaito bhavatyeṣa brahmalokaḥ samrāḍiti
eṣāsya paramā gatireṣāsya paramā sampadeṣo'sya paramo loka eṣo'sya parama ānandaḥ
etasyaivānandasyānyāni bhūtāni mātrāmupajīvanti

24.31Where there is something else, as it were, there one sees another, smells another, speaks to another, thinks of another, knows another. Become water, one, the seer without a second — this is the world of Brahman, your majesty. This is his highest way, his highest prize, his highest world, his highest joy. On a portion of this joy other beings live.

The last clause is the one the Taittiriya will turn into arithmetic. Everything anyone has ever enjoyed is a fraction taken off one quantity, and the fraction is what the word matram means: a measure, a part cut to size.

तद्यथानः सुसमाहितमुत्सर्जद्यायात् ।
एवमेवायं शारीर आत्मा प्राज्ञेनात्मनान्वारूढ उत्सर्जन् याति यत्रैतदूर्ध्वोच्छ्वासी भवति ।
स यत्रायमणिमानं न्येति जरया वोपतपता वाणिमानं निगच्छति ।
तद्यथाम्रं वोदुम्बरं वा पिप्पलं वा बन्धनात्प्रमुच्यते ।
एवमेवायं पुरुष एभ्योऽङ्गेभ्यः सम्प्रमुच्य पुनः प्रतिन्यायं प्रतियोन्याद्रवति प्राणायैव ।
tadyathānaḥ susamāhitamutsarjadyāyāt
evamevāyaṃ śārīra ātmā prājñenātmanānvārūḍha utsarjan yāti yatraitadūrdhvocchvāsī bhavati
24.36
sa yatrāyamaṇimānaṃ nyeti jarayā vopatapatā vāṇimānaṃ nigacchati
tadyathāmraṃ vodumbaraṃ vā pippalaṃ vā bandhanātpramucyate
evamevāyaṃ puruṣa ebhyo'ṅgebhyaḥ sampramucya punaḥ pratinyāyaṃ pratiyonyādravati prāṇāyaiva

24.35As a heavily loaded cart goes creaking, so the self of the body goes creaking, carrying the self that knows, when the breathing is only upward. When this body comes to thinness through old age or through illness — as a mango or a fig or a pipal fruit comes loose from its stalk, so this person comes loose from these limbs and goes back, by the way he came, to the breath.

The two images of dying are placed one after the other and neither is dramatic. The cart is a description of sound; the fruit is a description of ripeness. Nothing cuts the stalk in the second image, and nothing is subtracted in the first.

Desire and what comes of it

एकीभवति न पश्यतीत्याहुरेकीभवति न विजानातीत्याहुः ।
तस्य हैतस्य हृदयस्याग्रं प्रद्योतते । तेन प्रद्योतेनैष आत्मा निष्क्रामति ।
चक्षुष्टो वा मूर्ध्नो वान्येभ्यो वा शरीरदेशेभ्यः ।
तं विद्याकर्मणी समन्वारभेते पूर्वप्रज्ञा च ।
तद्यथा तृणजलायुका तृणस्यान्तं
गत्वाऽन्यमाक्रममाक्रम्यात्मानमुपसंहरत्येवमेवायमात्मेदं
शरीरं निहत्याविद्यां
गमयित्वाऽन्यमाक्रममाक्रम्याऽऽत्मानमुपसंहरति ॥ ३
तद्यथा पेशस्कारी पेशसो मात्रामपादायान्यन्नवतरं कल्याणतरं रूपं तनुते ।
एवमेवायमात्मेदं शरीरं निहत्याविद्यां गमयित्वान्यन्नवतरं कल्याणतरं रूपं कुरुते ।
अथो खल्वाहुः काममय एवायं पुरुष इति ।
स यथाकामो भवति तत्क्रतुर्भवति ।
यत्क्रतुर्भवति तत्कर्म कुरुते । यत्कर्म कुरुते तदभिसम्पद्यते ।
ekībhavati na paśyatītyāhurekībhavati na vijānātītyāhuḥ
tasya haitasya hṛdayasyāgraṃ pradyotate | tena pradyotenaiṣa ātmā niṣkrāmati
cakṣuṣṭo vā mūrdhno vānyebhyo vā śarīradeśebhyaḥ
taṃ vidyākarmaṇī samanvārabhete pūrvaprajñā ca
25.3
tadyathā tṛṇajalāyukā tṛṇasyāntaṃ
gatvā'nyamākramamākramyātmānamupasaṃharatyevamevāyamātmedaṃ
śarīraṃ nihatyāvidyāṃ
gamayitvā'nyamākramamākramyā''tmānamupasaṃharati
25.4
tadyathā peśaskārī peśaso mātrāmapādāyānyannavataraṃ kalyāṇataraṃ rūpaṃ tanute
evamevāyamātmedaṃ śarīraṃ nihatyāvidyāṃ gamayitvānyannavataraṃ kalyāṇataraṃ rūpaṃ kurute
25.5
atho khalvāhuḥ kāmamaya evāyaṃ puruṣa iti
sa yathākāmo bhavati tatkraturbhavati
yatkraturbhavati tatkarma kurute | yatkarma kurute tadabhisampadyate

25.2It becomes one, they say; he does not see, he does not know. The point of the heart lights up, and by that light the Self goes out, through the eye, or through the crown, or through some other part of the body. Knowledge and works take hold of him, and so does former understanding. As a caterpillar, having come to the end of a blade of grass, draws itself together and reaches out for the next, so the Self, having struck down this body and put ignorance aside, draws itself together and reaches out for the next. As a goldsmith, taking a piece of an ornament, makes another newer and more beautiful shape, so the Self, having struck down this body and put ignorance aside, makes another newer and more beautiful shape. They also say: this person is made of desire. As his desire is, so is his resolve; as his resolve is, so is the act he does; as the act he does is, so is what he comes to.

The caterpillar is the text's answer to the question of whether there is a gap, and the answer is no: the front end is on the next blade before the back end leaves this one. The goldsmith says the same about what the new shape is made of. The sentence in verse 5 is the one Easwaran puts at the front of his edition, and it is a chain of four terms in which each one is fixed by the one before it, which is what makes it a practical teaching rather than a doctrine of fate. The only term anybody has a grip on is the first.

Nothing is put down before the next is taken up the image what it does what is ruled out the caterpillar reaches the next blade no gap between the two the goldsmith makes a newer shape and no new material for it the self at death strikes down this body and reaches out for the next The question the two images answer is whether there is an interval, and the answer is no. What the goldsmith says about the material the caterpillar says about the time.
Figure 42.37 — Sections 25.3 and 25.4. Two images that between them rule out an interval and a fresh material.
तदेव सक्तः सह कर्मणैति लिङ्गं मनो यत्र निषक्तमस्य ।
प्राप्यान्तं कर्मणस्तस्य यत्किञ्चेह करोत्ययम् ।
तस्माल्लोकात्पुनरैत्यस्मै लोकाय कर्मणे ।
तद्यथाऽहिनिर्व्लयनी वल्मीके मृता प्रत्यस्ता शयीत ।
एवमेवेदं शरीरं शेतेऽथायमशरीरोऽमृतः प्राणो ब्रह्मैव तेज एव ।
tadeva saktaḥ saha karmaṇaiti liṅgaṃ mano yatra niṣaktamasya
prāpyāntaṃ karmaṇastasya yatkiñceha karotyayam
tasmāllokātpunaraityasmai lokāya karmaṇe
25.7
tadyathā'hinirvlayanī valmīke mṛtā pratyastā śayīta
evamevedaṃ śarīraṃ śete'thāyamaśarīro'mṛtaḥ prāṇo brahmaiva teja eva

25.6Attached, he goes with his work to wherever his mind is fastened. Coming to the end of the work, whatever he does here, he comes back from that world to this world, to work. As the sloughed skin of a snake lies cast off on an anthill, dead, so this body lies. Then the bodiless one is the deathless, is breath, is Brahman, is light. I give you a thousand cows, said Janaka of Videha.

The skin on the anthill is the last of the images and the most economical: what is left is not damaged, and it is not the animal. Janaka's response is to give away another thousand cows, which is the second of three times he pays, and the third time he offers the kingdom and himself with it.

Four terms, each one fixed by the term before it desire what he is made of resolve as the desire is the act as the resolve is what he comes to as the act is The only term anybody has a grip on is the first, which is what makes this practical. Easwaran puts the sentence at the front of his edition, where it works as an instruction. Verse 6 adds the return: attached, he goes where the mind is fastened, and comes back.
Figure 42.38 — Section 25.5. A chain of four terms in which only the first is under anybody's hand.

Da

The last passage in Easwaran's selection is a fable about hearing, and it takes three lines.

तेभ्यो हैतदक्षरमुवाच द इति व्यज्ञासिष्टेति ।
व्यज्ञासिष्मेति होचुर्दाम्यतेति न आत्थेत्योमिति होवाच व्यज्ञासिष्टेति ।
अथ हैनं मनुष्या ऊचुर्ब्रवीतु नो भवानिति ।
तेभ्यो हैतदेवाक्षरमुवाच द इति । व्यज्ञासिष्मेति होचुर्दत्तेति न आत्थेति ।
अथ हैनमसुरा ऊचुर्ब्रवीतु नो भवानिति ।
तेभ्यो हैतदेवाक्षरमुवाच द इति । व्यज्ञासिष्मेति होचुर्दयध्वमिति न आत्थेति ।
तदेतदेवैषा दैवी वागनुवदति स्तनयित्नुर्द द द इति दाम्यत दत्त दयध्वमिति ।
tebhyo haitadakṣaramuvāca da iti vyajñāsiṣṭeti
vyajñāsiṣmeti hocurdāmyateti na ātthetyomiti hovāca vyajñāsiṣṭeti
29.2
atha hainaṃ manuṣyā ūcurbravītu no bhavāniti
tebhyo haitadevākṣaramuvāca da iti | vyajñāsiṣmeti hocurdatteti na āttheti
29.3
atha hainamasurā ūcurbravītu no bhavāniti
tebhyo haitadevākṣaramuvāca da iti | vyajñāsiṣmeti hocurdayadhvamiti na āttheti
tadetadevaiṣā daivī vāganuvadati stanayitnurda da da iti dāmyata datta dayadhvamiti

29.1The three kinds of children of Prajapati lived with their father as students: the gods, human beings and the anti-gods. To the gods he said this one syllable: da. Did you understand? We understood, they said; you said to us, restrain yourselves. Yes, he said; you understood. Then the human beings said to him: tell us something. To them he said the same syllable, da. We understood, they said; you said to us, give. Then the anti-gods said to him: tell us something. To them he said the same syllable, da. We understood, they said; you said to us, be compassionate. That same thing the divine voice, the thunder, repeats: da da da — restrain yourselves, give, be compassionate. These three are to be learned: restraint, giving, compassion.

One syllable, three hearings da said three times the gods human beings the anti-gods restrain yourselves who have everything give who hoard be compassionate who are cruel All three readings are accepted. What fixes the meaning is what the hearer is short of. The thunder repeats the three, and the text says the three are what is to be learned.
Figure 42.39 — One syllable and three hearings. Each group completes the sound with the word for the thing it lacks, and the teacher's answer each time is that the hearing was correct.

Three groups are given the identical instruction and all three answers are accepted. What determines the meaning is not the teacher and not the sound but what the hearer is short of, and the fable is careful to make the gods, who have everything, the ones who need restraint. T. S. Eliot ended The Waste Land with the three words, and the thunder that says them there is the thunder of this passage.

Chandogya: the sacred song

The Chandogya belongs to the Sama Veda, the Veda that is sung, and its name comes from chandoga, the singer of the chanted portion, and behind that from chandas, song. Nagler's summary of its cosmology is that the world came out of the unchanging as a meaningful sound is uttered: not a big bang but a big OM. Its eight chapters hold a hundred and fifty-four sections, and as elsewhere here the sections are counted straight through, so that the sixth chapter, where Uddalaka teaches his son, runs from section ninety-eight to section a hundred and thirteen. Two principles run under the whole of it. One is rita, order or regularity, without which nothing could be learned from experience at all. The other is yajna, sacrifice, which Nagler glosses as the giving up of personal gain, and which is what a creature does that is living in accordance with the first.

The third chapter contains the text's own version of the honey doctrine and the sentence that Shankara built a system on.

असौ वा आदित्यो देवमधु तस्य द्यौरेव तिरश्चीनवंशः ।
अन्तरिक्षमपूपो मरीचयः पुत्राः ।
गायत्री वा इदं सर्वं भूतं यदिदं किं च ।
वाग्वै गायत्री वाग्वा इदं सर्वं भूतं गायति च त्रायते च ।
सर्वं खल्विदं ब्रह्म तज्जलानिति शान्त उपासीत ।
अथ खलु क्रतुमयः पुरुषो यथाक्रतुरस्मिंल्लोके पुरुषो भवति तथेतः प्रेत्य भवति ।
एष म आत्मान्तर्हृदय एतद्ब्रह्म ।
एतमितः प्रेत्याभिसम्भविताऽस्मीति यस्य स्यादद्धा न विचिकित्सास्ति ।
इति ह स्माह शाण्डिल्यः शाण्डिल्यः ।
asau vā ādityo devamadhu tasya dyaureva tiraścīnavaṃśaḥ
antarikṣamapūpo marīcayaḥ putrāḥ
49.1
gāyatrī vā idaṃ sarvaṃ bhūtaṃ yadidaṃ kiṃ ca
vāgvai gāyatrī vāgvā idaṃ sarvaṃ bhūtaṃ gāyati ca trāyate ca
51.1
sarvaṃ khalvidaṃ brahma tajjalāniti śānta upāsīta
atha khalu kratumayaḥ puruṣo yathākraturasmiṃlloke puruṣo bhavati tathetaḥ pretya bhavati
51.4
eṣa ma ātmāntarhṛdaya etadbrahma
etamitaḥ pretyābhisambhavitā'smīti yasya syādaddhā na vicikitsāsti
iti ha smāha śāṇḍilyaḥ śāṇḍilyaḥ

38.1That sun over there is the honey of the gods. Heaven is its crossbeam, the middle air its honeycomb, the rays of light its brood. The Gayatri is all this, whatever has come to be. Speech is the Gayatri, and speech sings all this that has come to be, and protects it. All this is Brahman; being quiet, one should worship it as that from which one comes, into which one goes, by which one breathes. A person is made of resolve. As his resolve is in this world, so, having gone from here, he becomes. This is my Self within the heart. This is Brahman. Going hence I shall reach it. One who has this and does not doubt it — so said Shandilya, so said Shandilya.

The word rendered here as that from which one comes, into which one goes, by which one breathes is a single coined word, tajjalan, made of three fragments, and Shankara's comment unpacks it as those three clauses. The passage is called the wisdom of Shandilya and it is one long sentence: everything is Brahman, a person is what he resolves, therefore resolve accordingly. It is the same claim about desire that the Brihadaranyaka makes, set inside a cosmology instead of beside a deathbed.

Uddalaka and Shvetaketu

The sixth chapter is the most sustained argument in the Upanishads and the passage the tradition treats as its centre. A boy is sent away at twelve, studies for twelve years, and comes back pleased with himself.

श्वेतकेतो यन्नु सोम्येदं महामना अनूचानमानी स्तब्धोऽसि ।
उत तमादेशमप्राक्ष्यः येनाश्रुतं श्रुतं भवत्यमतं मतमविज्ञातं विज्ञातमिति ।
कथं नु भगवः स आदेशो भवतीति ।
यथा सोम्यैकेन मृत्पिण्डेन सर्वं मृन्मयं विज्ञातं स्यात् ।
वाचारम्भणं विकारो नामधेयं मृत्तिकेत्येव सत्यम् ।
यथा सोम्यैकेन नखनिकृन्तनेन सर्वं कार्ष्णायसं विज्ञातं स्यात् ।
वाचारम्भणं विकारो नामधेयं कृष्णायसमित्येव सत्यम् ।
एवं सोम्य स आदेशो भवतीति ।
śvetaketo yannu somyedaṃ mahāmanā anūcānamānī stabdho'si
uta tamādeśamaprākṣyaḥ yenāśrutaṃ śrutaṃ bhavatyamataṃ matamavijñātaṃ vijñātamiti
kathaṃ nu bhagavaḥ sa ādeśo bhavatīti
98.4
yathā somyaikena mṛtpiṇḍena sarvaṃ mṛnmayaṃ vijñātaṃ syāt
vācārambhaṇaṃ vikāro nāmadheyaṃ mṛttiketyeva satyam
98.6
yathā somyaikena nakhanikṛntanena sarvaṃ kārṣṇāyasaṃ vijñātaṃ syāt
vācārambhaṇaṃ vikāro nāmadheyaṃ kṛṣṇāyasamityeva satyam
evaṃ somya sa ādeśo bhavatīti

98.3Shvetaketu, since you are now proud, thinking yourself learned, and stiff — did you ask for that instruction by which the unheard becomes heard, the unthought thought, the unknown known? How, sir, is that instruction? As by one lump of clay everything made of clay may be known — the change is a turn of speech, a name; the clay alone is real. As by one nail-clipper everything made of iron may be known — the change is a turn of speech, a name; the iron alone is real.

The three illustrations of clay, gold and iron are the warrant for everything that follows, and they make an epistemological claim before they make a metaphysical one. Knowing one lump exhausts the class, because what distinguishes the pot from the plate is nama-rupa, name and shape, and the phrase Easwaran's Sanskrit uses for it, vacharambhanam, means a thing got hold of by speech. The father is not saying that pots are unreal. He is saying that a pot is not a second substance.

Know one lump, and the whole class is known the one thing the many what tells them apart a lump of clay everything made of clay a name, a turn of speech a piece of gold everything made of gold a name, a turn of speech one nail-clipper everything made of iron a name, a turn of speech The claim is about knowing before it is about being: one lump exhausts the class. A pot is not said to be unreal. It is said not to be a second substance.
Figure 42.40 — Section 98.4 to 98.6. The same argument three times, and the third column is where the work is done.
सदेव सोम्येदमग्र आसीदेकमेवाद्वितीयम् ।
तद्धैक आहुरसदेवेदमग्र आसीदेकमेवाद्वितीयम् ।
तस्मादसतः सज्जायत ।
तदैक्षत बहु स्यां प्रजायेयेति तत्तेजोऽसृजत ।
तत्तेज ऐक्षत बहु स्यां प्रजायेयेति तदपोऽसृजत ।
sadeva somyedamagra āsīdekamevādvitīyam
taddhaika āhurasadevedamagra āsīdekamevādvitīyam
tasmādasataḥ sajjāyata
99.3
tadaikṣata bahu syāṃ prajāyeyeti tattejo'sṛjata
tatteja aikṣata bahu syāṃ prajāyeyeti tadapo'sṛjata

99.1In the beginning, dear one, this was being alone, one without a second. Some say that in the beginning this was non-being alone, one without a second, and that from non-being being was born. It thought: let me be many, let me bring forth. It sent forth heat. The heat thought: let me be many, let me bring forth. It sent forth water.

The rejection in verse 1 is the earliest philosophical disagreement recorded in the collection, and it is set out fairly: the rival position is stated in the rival's own words before it is refused. What replaces it is not a creator outside the world but a sequence of self-multiplications, and the verb at each step is aikshata, it looked or considered, which is why the chain is one of thought rather than of making.

In the beginning, being alone, one without a second some say: non-being alone, and being born of it quoted first, then refused being it looked, and thought heat let me be many water let me be many food and so the rest The verb at each step is aikshata, it considered: the chain is one of thought, not of making. The earliest recorded disagreement in the collection, and the rival is stated fairly.
Figure 42.41 — Section 99. The rival position is stated in its own words and refused; what replaces it is a chain of thoughts.
उद्दालको हारुणिः श्वेतकेतुं पुत्रमुवाच स्वप्नान्तं मे सोम्य विजानीहीति ।
यत्रैतत्पुरुषः स्वपिति नाम सता सोम्य तदा सम्पन्नो भवति स्वमपीतो भवति ।
तस्मादेनं स्वपितीत्याचक्षते स्वं ह्यपीतो भवति ।
स यथा शकुनिः सूत्रेण प्रबद्धो दिशं दिशं पतित्वा ।
अन्यत्रायतनमलब्ध्वा बन्धनमेवोपश्रयते ।
एवमेव खलु सोम्य तन्मनो दिशं दिशं पतित्वान्यत्रायतनमलब्ध्वा प्राणमेवोपश्रयते ।
प्राणबन्धनं हि सोम्य मन इति ।
uddālako hāruṇiḥ śvetaketuṃ putramuvāca svapnāntaṃ me somya vijānīhīti
yatraitatpuruṣaḥ svapiti nāma satā somya tadā sampanno bhavati svamapīto bhavati
tasmādenaṃ svapitītyācakṣate svaṃ hyapīto bhavati
105.2
sa yathā śakuniḥ sūtreṇa prabaddho diśaṃ diśaṃ patitvā
anyatrāyatanamalabdhvā bandhanamevopaśrayate
evameva khalu somya tanmano diśaṃ diśaṃ patitvānyatrāyatanamalabdhvā prāṇamevopaśrayate
prāṇabandhanaṃ hi somya mana iti

105.1Uddalaka Aruni said to his son Shvetaketu: learn from me what sleep is. When a man here sleeps, as they call it, then, dear one, he has gone to being; he has gone to his own. That is why they say of him, he sleeps: he has gone to his own. As a bird tied by a string flies in every direction and, finding no resting place elsewhere, settles down on the tether — so, dear one, the mind flies in every direction, and, finding no resting place elsewhere, settles down on breath. For the mind, dear one, is tethered to breath.

The pun in verse 1 is the text's own and it is the reason the passage exists: svapiti, he sleeps, is heard as sva plus apita, gone to his own. The tethered bird that follows is the image Nagler calls the most poignant in the collection, and what it claims is that the mind's wandering is not free. It ends where it does not because it has chosen to but because the string has run out.

Where the mind comes to rest, and why the mind tied by a string flies one way no resting place flies another no resting place settles on breath the tether itself and it was never free to stop anywhere else It ends where it does because the string has run out, not because it chose to. The pun is the text's own: svapiti, he sleeps, heard as sva apita, gone to his own.
Figure 42.42 — Section 105.2. The mind's wandering, and the length of the string that ends it.
स य एषोऽणिमैतदात्म्यमिदं सर्वं तत्सत्यं स आत्मा तत्त्वमसि श्वेतकेतो इति ।
sa ya eṣo'ṇimaitadātmyamidaṃ sarvaṃ tatsatyaṃ sa ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti

105.7That which is the finest part — all this has that for its self. That is the real. That is the Self. You are that, Shvetaketu.

The sentence repeats nine times, once at the end of each illustration, and it is the first of the four great formulae. Easwaran is careful about the pronoun: the "you" is not the boy's personality but, in his phrase, the consciousness which makes the eye see and the mind think. What follows is the series of nine illustrations, each of which claims something different about the same identity.

यथा सोम्य मधु मधुकृतो निस्तिष्ठन्ति ।
नानात्ययानां वृक्षाणां रसान् समवहारमेकतां रसं गमयन्ति ।
ते यथा तत्र न विवेकं लभन्तेऽमुष्याहं वृक्षस्य रसोऽस्मीति ।
एवमेव खलु सोम्येमाः सर्वाः प्रजाः सति सम्पद्य न विदुः सति सम्पद्यामह इति ।
इमाः सोम्य नद्यः पुरस्तात्प्राच्यः स्यन्दन्ते पश्चात्प्रतीच्यः ।
ताः समुद्रात्समुद्रमेवापियन्ति स समुद्र एव भवति ।
ता यथा तत्र न विदुरियमहमस्मीयमहमस्मीति ।
एवमेव खलु सोम्येमाः सर्वाः प्रजाः सत आगम्य न विदुः सत आगच्छामह इति ।
yathā somya madhu madhukṛto nistiṣṭhanti
nānātyayānāṃ vṛkṣāṇāṃ rasān samavahāramekatāṃ rasaṃ gamayanti
106.2
te yathā tatra na vivekaṃ labhante'muṣyāhaṃ vṛkṣasya raso'smīti
evameva khalu somyemāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ sati sampadya na viduḥ sati sampadyāmaha iti
107.1
imāḥ somya nadyaḥ purastātprācyaḥ syandante paścātpratīcyaḥ
tāḥ samudrātsamudramevāpiyanti sa samudra eva bhavati
tā yathā tatra na viduriyamahamasmīyamahamasmīti
107.2
evameva khalu somyemāḥ sarvāḥ prajāḥ sata āgamya na viduḥ sata āgacchāmaha iti

106.1As the bees, dear one, make honey by gathering the juices of trees standing far apart, and reduce them to one juice. And as those juices have there no discrimination, so as to say, I am the juice of this tree, I am the juice of that — so, dear one, all these creatures, having reached being, do not know that they have reached being. These rivers, dear one, flow east in the east and west in the west. From the sea they go to the sea. It becomes the sea itself. And as they do not know there, I am this one, I am that one. So, dear one, all these creatures, having come from being, do not know that they have come from being.

Nine illustrations, one refrain sleep, the tethered bird bees and the one honey rivers reaching the sea the tree that is struck the seed of the fig salt in water the blindfolded man the man who is dying the ordeal by fire nine in all you are that said after each one and asked for again Two of the nine are about what a thing is made of; the rest are about what a creature inside it can find out. The boy asks to be told again eight times, which is how the chapter is built.
Figure 42.43 — The nine illustrations of the sixth chapter and what each is asked to carry. Only two of them are about substance; the rest are about what the creature can and cannot find out from inside.

Bees and rivers make the same point from opposite ends. The honey is a merger of things that were distinct and can no longer be told apart; the rivers merge into something that was there first, and the sentence that closes each is not that they have become one but that they do not know it. The teaching is about ignorance rather than about unity, which is why it can be taught at all.

Juices of trees standing far apart one tree's juice one tree's juice one tree's juice one tree's juice one tree's juice one honey no juice can say which tree it came from All these creatures, having reached being, do not know that they have reached it. The teaching is about the ignorance, not the unity, which is why it can be taught.
Figure 42.44 — Section 106. What many trees give becomes one substance that belongs to none of them.
अस्य सोम्य महतो वृक्षस्य यो मूलेऽभ्याहन्याज्जीवन् स्रवेत् ।
यो मध्येऽभ्याहन्याज्जीवन् स्रवेद्योऽग्रेऽभ्याहन्याज्जीवन् स्रवेत् ।
स एष जीवेनात्मनानुप्रभूतः पेपीयमानो मोदमानस्तिष्ठति ।
जीवापेतं वाव किलेदं म्रियते न जीवो म्रियत इति ।
न्यग्रोधफलमत आहरेति । इदं भगव इति । भिन्द्धीति । भिन्नं भगव इति ।
किमत्र पश्यसीति । अण्व्य इवेमा धाना भगव इति ।
आसामङ्गैकां भिन्द्धीति । भिन्ना भगव इति । किमत्र पश्यसीति । न किञ्चन भगव इति ।
तं होवाच यं वै सोम्यैतमणिमानं न निभालयसे ।
एतस्य वै सोम्यैषोऽणिम्न एवं महान्यग्रोधस्तिष्ठति । श्रद्धत्स्व सोम्येति ।
asya somya mahato vṛkṣasya yo mūle'bhyāhanyājjīvan sravet
yo madhye'bhyāhanyājjīvan sravedyo'gre'bhyāhanyājjīvan sravet
sa eṣa jīvenātmanānuprabhūtaḥ pepīyamāno modamānastiṣṭhati
108.3
jīvāpetaṃ vāva kiledaṃ mriyate na jīvo mriyata iti
109.1
nyagrodhaphalamata āhareti | idaṃ bhagava iti | bhinddhīti | bhinnaṃ bhagava iti
kimatra paśyasīti | aṇvya ivemā dhānā bhagava iti
āsāmaṅgaikāṃ bhinddhīti | bhinnā bhagava iti | kimatra paśyasīti | na kiñcana bhagava iti
109.2
taṃ hovāca yaṃ vai somyaitamaṇimānaṃ na nibhālayase
etasya vai somyaiṣo'ṇimna evaṃ mahānyagrodhastiṣṭhati | śraddhatsva somyeti

108.1Of this great tree, dear one: if one struck at the root it would bleed and live; if one struck at the middle it would bleed and live; if one struck at the top it would bleed and live. Pervaded by the living self it stands, drinking and rejoicing. What is left by the living dies; the living itself does not die. Bring me a fruit from that fig tree. Here it is, sir. Split it. It is split, sir. What do you see there? These seeds, very fine. Split one of them. It is split, sir. What do you see there? Nothing at all, sir. He said to him: that fineness which you do not perceive — from that fineness, dear one, this great fig tree stands. Have faith, dear one.

The tree and the seed are placed together and they hold opposite ends of the same claim. The tree shows that life can be withdrawn by parts and that the part that withdraws is not the part that bleeds; the seed shows that what accounts for the whole tree is not a small thing but no thing that inspection finds. The instruction Uddalaka gives when the boy reports seeing nothing is not an argument. It is shraddhatsva, have faith, which in this text means take the next step and see.

Struck at the root, and split down to nothing struck at the root struck at the middle struck at the top it bleeds and it lives what the living leaves dies; the living itself does not die split the fig: fine seeds split one seed: nothing at all nothing that inspection finds from that fineness the tree stands; have faith, dear one The tree shows life withdrawn by parts; the seed shows what accounts for the whole. When the boy reports seeing nothing, the instruction is shraddhatsva: take the next step.
Figure 42.45 — Sections 108 and 109. On the left, what can be withdrawn by parts; on the right, what inspection never finds.
लवणमेतदुदकेऽवधाय अथ मा प्रातरुपसीदथा इति ।
स ह तथा चकार । तं होवाच यद्दोषा लवणमुदकेऽवाधाः अङ्ग तदाहरेति ।
तद्धावमृश्य न विवेद ।
यथा विलीनमेवाङ्ग । अस्यान्तादाचामेति । कथमिति । लवणमिति ।
मध्यादाचामेति । कथमिति । लवणमिति । अन्तादाचामेति । कथमिति । लवणमिति ।
तं होवाचात्र वाव किल तत्सोम्य न निभालयसेऽत्रैव किलेति ।
यथा सोम्य पुरुषं गन्धारेभ्योऽभिनद्धाक्षमानीय तं ततोऽतिजने विसृजेत् ।
स यथा तत्र प्राङ्वोदङ्वाधराङ्वा प्रत्यङ्वा प्रध्मायीत ।
अभिनद्धाक्ष आनीतोऽभिनद्धाक्षो विसृष्टः ।
तस्य यथाभिनहनं प्रमुच्य प्रब्रूयादेतां दिशं गन्धारा एतां दिशं व्रजेति ।
स ग्रामाद्ग्रामं पृच्छन् पण्डितो मेधावी गन्धारानेवोपसम्पद्येत ।
एवमेवेहाचार्यवान् पुरुषो वेद ।
lavaṇametadudake'vadhāya atha mā prātarupasīdathā iti
sa ha tathā cakāra | taṃ hovāca yaddoṣā lavaṇamudake'vādhāḥ aṅga tadāhareti
taddhāvamṛśya na viveda
110.2
yathā vilīnamevāṅga | asyāntādācāmeti | kathamiti | lavaṇamiti
madhyādācāmeti | kathamiti | lavaṇamiti | antādācāmeti | kathamiti | lavaṇamiti
taṃ hovācātra vāva kila tatsomya na nibhālayase'traiva kileti
111.1
yathā somya puruṣaṃ gandhārebhyo'bhinaddhākṣamānīya taṃ tato'tijane visṛjet
sa yathā tatra prāṅvodaṅvādharāṅvā pratyaṅvā pradhmāyīta
abhinaddhākṣa ānīto'bhinaddhākṣo visṛṣṭaḥ
111.2
tasya yathābhinahanaṃ pramucya prabrūyādetāṃ diśaṃ gandhārā etāṃ diśaṃ vrajeti
sa grāmādgrāmaṃ pṛcchan paṇḍito medhāvī gandhārānevopasampadyeta
evamevehācāryavān puruṣo veda

110.1Put this salt in water and come to me in the morning. He did so. He said to him: bring me the salt you put in the water last night. He felt for it and did not find it. It has dissolved. Taste from this end. How is it? Salt. Taste from the middle. How is it? Salt. Taste from that end. How is it? Salt. He said to him: here indeed you do not perceive it, and here indeed it is. As a man might be brought from the land of Gandhara with his eyes bandaged and then let go in a deserted place, and there might drift east or north or south or west, having been brought blindfold and let go blindfold. And as, if someone took the bandage off and told him, Gandhara is in that direction, go that way, he would ask from village to village and, being informed and able, reach Gandhara — so a man who has a teacher knows.

Two experiments set for the same boy the salt put it in water overnight look for it: it is not found taste at either end and the middle here you do not see it, and here it is the man from Gandhara carried off blindfold and let go he turns every way and shouts the bandage off, and a direction he asks village by village and arrives The first is why a teacher seems unnecessary; the second is why one is needed anyway. The teacher does two things and no more; the walking is left to the man.
Figure 42.46 — The two experiments of the sixth chapter. The left is what cannot be seen and can be tasted anywhere; the right is what a teacher does and what the student must still do himself.

The salt is the experiment the chapter is remembered for, and it is designed so that the failure comes first: the boy is made to look for the salt and not find it before he is told to taste. The blindfolded man is the answer to the obvious objection, which is why a teacher should be needed at all if the thing is everywhere. The teacher does two things in the story and only two: he takes off the bandage and says which way. The walking from village to village, asking at each, is left to the man.

पुरुषं सोम्योतोपतापिनं ज्ञातयः पर्युपासते जानासि मां जानासि मामिति ।
तस्य यावन्न वाङ्मनसि सम्पद्यते मनः प्राणे प्राणस्तेजसि तेजः परस्यां देवतायाम् ।
तावज्जानाति ।
अथ यदास्य वाङ्मनसि सम्पद्यते मनः प्राणे प्राणस्तेजसि तेजः परस्यां देवतायाम् ।
अथ न जानाति ।
एतदात्म्यमिदं सर्वं तत्सत्यं स आत्मा तत्त्वमसि श्वेतकेतो इति ।
तद्धास्य विजज्ञाविति विजज्ञाविति ।
puruṣaṃ somyotopatāpinaṃ jñātayaḥ paryupāsate jānāsi māṃ jānāsi māmiti
tasya yāvanna vāṅmanasi sampadyate manaḥ prāṇe prāṇastejasi tejaḥ parasyāṃ devatāyām
tāvajjānāti
112.2
atha yadāsya vāṅmanasi sampadyate manaḥ prāṇe prāṇastejasi tejaḥ parasyāṃ devatāyām
atha na jānāti
113.3
etadātmyamidaṃ sarvaṃ tatsatyaṃ sa ātmā tattvamasi śvetaketo iti
taddhāsya vijajñāviti vijajñāviti

112.1When a man, dear one, is lying ill, his relatives sit round him and ask, do you know me, do you know me? So long as his speech has not gone into mind, mind into breath, breath into heat, heat into the highest divinity, he knows them. When his speech has gone into mind, mind into breath, breath into heat, heat into the highest divinity, then he does not know them. All this has that for its self. That is the real. That is the Self. You are that, Shvetaketu. And he understood it — he understood it.

Dying is described as a sequence of mergings, and what the sequence explains is a fact anyone at a deathbed has seen, that recognition fails at a definite point while the body has not stopped. The chapter ends with the boy understanding, which is not how most Upanishadic dialogues end. The two illustrations Easwaran leaves out of his selection are the fast and the ordeal of the heated axe, and the chapter as printed goes straight from the dying man to the closing line.

Where recognition stops, and the body has not speech goes into the mind goes into breath goes into heat goes into the highest and stops the relatives sit round and ask: do you know me, do you know me up to here he knows them past here he does not What the sequence explains is a fact anyone at a deathbed has seen. The failure is at a definite point, and nothing about the body marks it.
Figure 42.47 — Section 112. The mergings in order, and the point in them at which recognition fails.

Narada asks for something else

The seventh chapter begins with the longest list of studies in Sanskrit literature and the shortest verdict on it.

अधीहि भगव इति होपससाद सनत्कुमारं नारदः ।
तं होवाच यद्वेत्थ तेन मोपसीद ततस्त ऊर्ध्वं वक्ष्यामीति । स होवाच ।
ऋग्वेदं भगवोऽध्येमि यजुर्वेदं सामवेदमाथर्वणं चतुर्थम् ।
इतिहासपुराणं पञ्चमं वेदानां वेदं पित्र्यं राशिं दैवं निधिं वाकोवाक्यम् ।
एकायनं देवविद्यां ब्रह्मविद्यां भूतविद्यां क्षत्रविद्यां नक्षत्रविद्याम् ।
सर्पदेवजनविद्यामेतद्भगवोऽध्येमि ।
सोऽहं भगवो मन्त्रविदेवास्मि नात्मवित् ।
श्रुतं ह्येव मे भगवद्दृशेभ्यस्तरति शोकमात्मविदिति ।
सोऽहं भगवः शोचामि तं मा भगवाञ्छोकस्य पारं तारयत्विति ।
तं होवाच यद्वै किञ्चैतदध्यगीष्ठा नामैवैतत् ।
adhīhi bhagava iti hopasasāda sanatkumāraṃ nāradaḥ
taṃ hovāca yadvettha tena mopasīda tatasta ūrdhvaṃ vakṣyāmīti | sa hovāca
114.2
ṛgvedaṃ bhagavo'dhyemi yajurvedaṃ sāmavedamātharvaṇaṃ caturtham
itihāsapurāṇaṃ pañcamaṃ vedānāṃ vedaṃ pitryaṃ rāśiṃ daivaṃ nidhiṃ vākovākyam
ekāyanaṃ devavidyāṃ brahmavidyāṃ bhūtavidyāṃ kṣatravidyāṃ nakṣatravidyām
sarpadevajanavidyāmetadbhagavo'dhyemi
114.3
so'haṃ bhagavo mantravidevāsmi nātmavit
śrutaṃ hyeva me bhagavaddṛśebhyastarati śokamātmaviditi
so'haṃ bhagavaḥ śocāmi taṃ mā bhagavāñchokasya pāraṃ tārayatviti
taṃ hovāca yadvai kiñcaitadadhyagīṣṭhā nāmaivaitat

114.1Teach me, sir, said Narada, coming to Sanatkumara. He said to him: come to me with what you know, and I shall tell you what is beyond it. He said: I know the Rig Veda, sir, the Yajur, the Sama, the Atharva as the fourth, the epic and the old stories as the fifth, the Veda of the Vedas, the rites for the fathers, arithmetic, divination, the science of times, logic, statecraft, the science of the gods, the science of scripture, the science of the elements, the science of war, the science of the stars, the science of snakes and of the fine arts. With all this, sir, I know the hymns and not the Self. I have heard from those like you that one who knows the Self crosses over sorrow. I am in sorrow, sir. Take me across it. He said to him: whatever you have learned here is only a name.

The list is meant to be complete: it runs from the four Vedas to snake-charming, and Narada's complaint is not that he has learned the wrong things but that he has learned everything there is and it did not do the one thing he needed. Sanatkumara's reply is four words in Sanskrit. What follows in the original is a ladder of sixteen steps, each transcending the last, from speech to mind to will and up to happiness; Easwaran prints the bottom and the top of it and leaves the rungs out.

Everything there was to learn, and the word for it what Narada had learned the four Vedas, and the fifth arithmetic, logic, statecraft the stars, the elements, war snake-charming, and the arts only a name the vast where nothing else is Where one sees, hears or knows something else, that is the small; and the small is mortal. The test is not size: whatever is still had alongside another thing is the small. The chapter closes in political words, svaraj and anyaraj: self-ruled, or ruled by another.
Figure 42.48 — Sections 114 and 136 to 138. Everything the schools taught on one side, and the definition of the vast on the other.
यो वै भूमा तत्सुखं नाल्पे सुखमस्ति भूमैव सुखम् ।
भूमा त्वेव विजिज्ञासितव्य इति ।
यत्र नान्यत्पश्यति नान्यच्छृणोति नान्यद्विजानाति स भूमा ।
अथ यत्रान्यत्पश्यत्यन्यच्छृणोत्यन्यद्विजानाति तदल्पम् ।
यो वै भूमा तदमृतमथ यदल्पं तन्मर्त्यम् ।
स एवाधस्तात्स उपरिष्टात्स पश्चात्स पुरस्तात्स दक्षिणतः स उत्तरतः ।
स एवेदं सर्वमिति ।
आत्मैवाधस्तादात्मोपरिष्टादात्मा पश्चादात्मा पुरस्तात् ।
आत्मैवेदं सर्वमिति ।
स वा एष एवं पश्यन्नेवं मन्वान एवं विजानन्नात्मरतिरात्मक्रीड आत्ममिथुन आत्मानन्दः स स्वराड्भवति ।
अथ येऽन्यथातो विदुरन्यराजानस्ते क्षय्यलोका भवन्ति ।
yo vai bhūmā tatsukhaṃ nālpe sukhamasti bhūmaiva sukham
bhūmā tveva vijijñāsitavya iti
137.1
yatra nānyatpaśyati nānyacchṛṇoti nānyadvijānāti sa bhūmā
atha yatrānyatpaśyatyanyacchṛṇotyanyadvijānāti tadalpam
yo vai bhūmā tadamṛtamatha yadalpaṃ tanmartyam
138.1
sa evādhastātsa upariṣṭātsa paścātsa purastātsa dakṣiṇataḥ sa uttarataḥ
sa evedaṃ sarvamiti
138.2
ātmaivādhastādātmopariṣṭādātmā paścādātmā purastāt
ātmaivedaṃ sarvamiti
sa vā eṣa evaṃ paśyannevaṃ manvāna evaṃ vijānannātmaratirātmakrīḍa ātmamithuna ātmānandaḥ sa svarāḍbhavati
atha ye'nyathāto viduranyarājānaste kṣayyalokā bhavanti

136.1What is vast is happiness. There is no happiness in the small. The vast alone is happiness. But the vast is what must be understood. Where one sees nothing else, hears nothing else, knows nothing else, that is the vast. Where one sees something else, hears something else, knows something else, that is small. The vast is the deathless; the small is mortal. It is below, it is above, it is behind, it is in front, it is to the south, it is to the north. It is all this. The Self is below, the Self is above, the Self is behind, the Self is in front. The Self is all this. One who sees this way, thinks this way, knows this way, takes pleasure in the Self, plays with the Self, has the Self for a companion and the Self for a joy — he is his own ruler. Those who know otherwise are ruled by another, and their worlds pass away.

The word bhuman, here rendered as the vast, is defined not by size but by the absence of a second thing, and the definition is turned into a test in verse 43: whatever is still had alongside something else is the small. The two words in the last line, svaraj and anyaraj, self-ruled and ruled-by-another, are political terms, and the chapter ends by making the whole ladder a question of which of the two one is.

आहारशुद्धौ सत्त्वशुद्धिः सत्त्वशुद्धौ ध्रुवा स्मृतिः ।
स्मृतिलम्भे सर्वग्रन्थीनां विप्रमोक्षः ।
āhāraśuddhau sattvaśuddhiḥ sattvaśuddhau dhruvā smṛtiḥ
smṛtilambhe sarvagranthīnāṃ vipramokṣaḥ

139.2When the food is pure, the nature is pure. When the nature is pure, memory stands firm. When memory is got, all the knots are loosed.

The last sentence is the one the tradition quotes as the bridge between diet and liberation, and the word for food, ahara, means what is taken in generally rather than what is eaten. What follows from purity is not virtue but smriti, memory, and what memory does is untie the knots the Katha also names.

The city of Brahman, and Indra's hundred and one years

अथ यदिदमस्मिन्ब्रह्मपुरे दहरं पुण्डरीकं वेश्म ।
दहरोऽस्मिन्नन्तराकाशस्तस्मिन्यदन्तस्तदन्वेष्टव्यं तद्वाव विजिज्ञासितव्यमिति ।
यावान्वा अयमाकाशस्तावानेषोऽन्तर्हृदय आकाशः ।
उभे अस्मिन् द्यावापृथिवी अन्तरेव समाहिते ।
उभावग्निश्च वायुश्च सूर्याचन्द्रमसावुभौ विद्युन्नक्षत्राणि ।
यच्चास्येहास्ति यच्च नास्ति सर्वं तदस्मिन्समाहितमिति ।
न अस्य जरयैतज्जीर्यति न वधेनास्य हन्यते ।
एतत्सत्यं ब्रह्मपुरमस्मिन् कामाः समाहिताः ।
एष आत्मापहतपाप्मा विजरो विमृत्युर्विशोको विजिघत्सोऽपिपासः सत्यकामः सत्यसंकल्पः ।
atha yadidamasminbrahmapure daharaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ veśma
daharo'sminnantarākāśastasminyadantastadanveṣṭavyaṃ tadvāva vijijñāsitavyamiti
140.3
yāvānvā ayamākāśastāvāneṣo'ntarhṛdaya ākāśaḥ
ubhe asmin dyāvāpṛthivī antareva samāhite
ubhāvagniśca vāyuśca sūryācandramasāvubhau vidyunnakṣatrāṇi
yaccāsyehāsti yacca nāsti sarvaṃ tadasminsamāhitamiti
140.5
na asya jarayaitajjīryati na vadhenāsya hanyate
etatsatyaṃ brahmapuramasmin kāmāḥ samāhitāḥ
eṣa ātmāpahatapāpmā vijaro vimṛtyurviśoko vijighatso'pipāsaḥ satyakāmaḥ satyasaṃkalpaḥ

140.1Now in this city of Brahman there is a small lotus dwelling, and in it a small space. What is inside that is to be sought, and that is what one should want to know. As great as this space is, so great is the space within the heart. Both heaven and earth are gathered in it, both fire and air, sun and moon, lightning and the stars. Whatever is his here and whatever is not, all of it is gathered in it. It does not grow old with the body's age and is not killed when the body is killed. This is the real city of Brahman, and in it the desires are gathered. It is the Self, free of evil, free of age and death and sorrow, free of hunger and thirst, whose desire is the real and whose resolve is the real.

The passage is about size and it makes a claim that reverses the obvious one. The space inside the heart is not a small copy of the space outside; the two are said to be equal in extent, and it is the outer one that is being measured against the inner. The rest of the chapter gives the consequences: what is inside cannot age with the body that contains it, and what one finds there is not less than what one lost.

Measured the other way round the space outside sky, and what is under it the thing being measured the space within the heart heaven and earth, fire and air sun and moon, lightning, the stars what is his here, and what is not as great as The inner one is not a small copy: the two are said to be equal in extent. It does not grow old with the body's age, and is not killed when the body is killed.
Figure 42.49 — Section 140. The outer space is the one being measured, and the inner is the measure.
य आत्मापहतपाप्मा विजरो विमृत्युर्विशोको विजिघत्सोऽपिपासः ।
सत्यकामः सत्यसंकल्पः सोऽन्वेष्टव्यः स विजिज्ञासितव्यः ।
स सर्वांश्च लोकानाप्नोति सर्वांश्च कामान् ।
इति ह प्रजापतिरुवाच ।
ya ātmāpahatapāpmā vijaro vimṛtyurviśoko vijighatso'pipāsaḥ
satyakāmaḥ satyasaṃkalpaḥ so'nveṣṭavyaḥ sa vijijñāsitavyaḥ
sa sarvāṃśca lokānāpnoti sarvāṃśca kāmān
iti ha prajāpatiruvāca

146.1The Self, free of evil, free of age and death and sorrow, free of hunger and thirst, whose desire is the real and whose resolve is the real — that is what is to be sought, that is what one should want to know. So said Prajapati.

The announcement travels, and two students come to hear it: Indra on behalf of the gods and Virochana on behalf of the anti-gods. They arrive with firewood in their hands, which is how a student presents himself, and they stay thirty-two years before anything is said to them.

उदशराव आत्मानमवेक्ष्य यदात्मनो न विजानीथस्तन्मे प्रब्रूतमिति ।
तौ होदशरावेऽवेक्षाञ्चक्राते । तौ ह प्रजापतिरुवाच किं पश्यथ इति ।
तौ होचतुः सर्वमेवेदमावां भगव आत्मानं पश्याव आ लोमभ्य आ नखेभ्यः प्रतिरूपमिति ।
तौ हान्वीक्ष्य प्रजापतिरुवाच अनुपलभ्यात्मानमननुविद्य व्रजतः ।
यतर एतदुपनिषदो भविष्यन्ति देवा वासुरा वा ते पराभविष्यन्तीति ।
स ह शान्तहृदय एव विरोचनोऽसुराञ्जगाम ।
udaśarāva ātmānamavekṣya yadātmano na vijānīthastanme prabrūtamiti
tau hodaśarāve'vekṣāñcakrāte | tau ha prajāpatiruvāca kiṃ paśyatha iti
tau hocatuḥ sarvamevedamāvāṃ bhagava ātmānaṃ paśyāva ā lomabhya ā nakhebhyaḥ pratirūpamiti
147.4
tau hānvīkṣya prajāpatiruvāca anupalabhyātmānamananuvidya vrajataḥ
yatara etadupaniṣado bhaviṣyanti devā vāsurā vā te parābhaviṣyantīti
sa ha śāntahṛdaya eva virocano'surāñjagāma

147.1Look at yourself in a pan of water, and whatever you do not make out about the Self, tell me. They looked into the pan of water. Prajapati said to them: what do you see? They said: we see the whole of ourselves, sir, right to the hairs and the nails, an exact likeness. Prajapati looked at them and said: they go away without having found the Self and without having recognized it. Whichever of the two, gods or anti-gods, take this as their teaching, they will be defeated. Virochana went back to the anti-gods with a quiet heart.

Four answers and three refusals what the teacher says what the student sees wrong years the face in the water blind with the blind, dead with the dead 32 the one who moves in dream it is chased, it weeps 32 the one in dreamless sleep nobody is there to whom it belongs 32 the one with no body at all nothing left to object to 5 Virochana stops at the first answer and takes it home. Indra objects three times and stays.
Figure 42.50 — The four teachings and the four objections. Prajapati gives the same answer each time; what changes is what Indra notices about it, and only the last survives.

The test in the pan of water is a trap and the teacher says so out loud after the students have gone. Virochana leaves satisfied because the answer confirms what he came in with, and the doctrine he takes home is that the body is what is to be served. The text then gives the etymology in its own way: people are called godless when they are without faith, and it is they who dress corpses in fine clothes.

यथैव खल्वयमस्मिञ्छरीरे साध्वलंकृते साध्वलंकृतो भवति ।
एवमेवायमस्मिन्नन्धेऽन्धो भवति स्रामे स्रामः परिवृक्णे परिवृक्णः ।
अस्यैव शरीरस्य नाशमन्वेष नश्यति । नाहमत्र भोग्यं पश्यामीति ।
य एष स्वप्ने महीयमानश्चरत्येष आत्मेति होवाच ।
एतदमृतमभयमेतद्ब्रह्मेति ।
न वधेनास्य हन्यते नास्य स्राम्येण स्रामः ।
घ्नन्ति त्वेवैनं विच्छादयन्तीवाप्रियवेत्तेव भवत्यपि रोदितीव ।
नाहमत्र भोग्यं पश्यामीति ।
तद्यत्रैतत्सुप्तः समस्तः सम्प्रसन्नः स्वप्नं न विजानात्येष आत्मेति होवाच ।
नाह खल्वयमेवं सम्प्रत्यात्मानं जानात्ययमहमस्मीति नो एवेमानि भूतानि ।
विनाशमेवापीतो भवति । नाहमत्र भोग्यं पश्यामीति ।
yathaiva khalvayamasmiñcharīre sādhvalaṃkṛte sādhvalaṃkṛto bhavati
evamevāyamasminnandhe'ndho bhavati srāme srāmaḥ parivṛkṇe parivṛkṇaḥ
asyaiva śarīrasya nāśamanveṣa naśyati | nāhamatra bhogyaṃ paśyāmīti
149.1
ya eṣa svapne mahīyamānaścaratyeṣa ātmeti hovāca
etadamṛtamabhayametadbrahmeti
149.2
na vadhenāsya hanyate nāsya srāmyeṇa srāmaḥ
ghnanti tvevainaṃ vicchādayantīvāpriyavetteva bhavatyapi roditīva
nāhamatra bhogyaṃ paśyāmīti
150.1
tadyatraitatsuptaḥ samastaḥ samprasannaḥ svapnaṃ na vijānātyeṣa ātmeti hovāca
nāha khalvayamevaṃ sampratyātmānaṃ jānātyayamahamasmīti no evemāni bhūtāni
vināśamevāpīto bhavati | nāhamatra bhogyaṃ paśyāmīti

148.1Just as this one becomes well-adorned when the body is well-adorned, so this one becomes blind when the body is blind, lame when it is lame, crippled when it is crippled. It perishes when the body perishes. I see nothing to be enjoyed in this. He who moves about in dream, magnified — that is the Self, he said; that is the deathless, the fearless; that is Brahman. It is not killed when the body is killed and is not lame with its lameness. Yet they strike it, they seem to chase it, it seems to feel what is unpleasant, it even seems to weep. I see nothing to be enjoyed in this. When one is asleep, gathered together, serene, and sees no dream — that is the Self, he said. But this one does not now know himself as I am this, nor does he know these beings. He has gone to destruction. I see nothing to be enjoyed in this.

Each of Indra's three objections is his own and each is exact. The reflection fails because it shares every defect of the body; the dreamer fails because it suffers; dreamless sleep fails because there is nobody there to whom the state belongs. Prajapati's reply each time is that Indra is thinking correctly, and the reward for thinking correctly is another term of study.

स हापराणि पञ्च वर्षाण्युवास तान्येकशतं सम्पेदुः ।
एतत्तद्यदाहुरेकशतं ह वै वर्षाणि मघवान् प्रजापतौ ब्रह्मचर्यमुवास ।
मघवन्मर्त्यं वा इदं शरीरमात्तं मृत्युना ।
तदस्यामृतस्याशरीरस्यात्मनोऽधिष्ठानम् ।
आत्तो वै सशरीरः प्रियाप्रियाभ्याम् । अशरीरं वाव सन्तं न प्रियाप्रिये स्पृशतः ।
एवमेवैष सम्प्रसादोऽस्माच्छरीरात्समुत्थाय परं ज्योतिरुपसम्पद्य स्वेन रूपेणाभिनिष्पद्यते ।
स उत्तमपुरुषः । स तत्र पर्येति जक्षत्क्रीडन् रममाणः ।
स यथा प्रयोग्य आचरणे युक्त एवमेवायमस्मिञ्छरीरे प्राणो युक्तः ।
sa hāparāṇi pañca varṣāṇyuvāsa tānyekaśataṃ sampeduḥ
etattadyadāhurekaśataṃ ha vai varṣāṇi maghavān prajāpatau brahmacaryamuvāsa
151.1
maghavanmartyaṃ vā idaṃ śarīramāttaṃ mṛtyunā
tadasyāmṛtasyāśarīrasyātmano'dhiṣṭhānam
ātto vai saśarīraḥ priyāpriyābhyām | aśarīraṃ vāva santaṃ na priyāpriye spṛśataḥ
151.3
evamevaiṣa samprasādo'smāccharīrātsamutthāya paraṃ jyotirupasampadya svena rūpeṇābhiniṣpadyate
sa uttamapuruṣaḥ | sa tatra paryeti jakṣatkrīḍan ramamāṇaḥ
sa yathā prayogya ācaraṇe yukta evamevāyamasmiñcharīre prāṇo yuktaḥ

150.3He lived another five years, which made a hundred and one in all. That is why they say: for a hundred and one years Indra lived as a student with Prajapati. Indra, this body is mortal, held by death. It is the standing place of that deathless, bodiless Self. One who has a body is held by the pleasant and the unpleasant; there is no warding off the pleasant and the unpleasant for one who has a body. The pleasant and the unpleasant do not touch one who is bodiless. So this serene one, rising out of this body and reaching the highest light, comes out in his own form. This is the highest person. He goes about there, laughing, playing, taking his pleasure. As a draught animal is yoked to a cart, so is the breath yoked in this body.

The fourth teaching is not a new object but the removal of one assumption from the third, and the assumption is that the Self has a body. The last comparison is the plainest statement of instrument in the collection: the ox is harnessed to the cart and is not a part of it, and what the passage says about the senses is that they are the harness and not the driver.

Shvetashvatara: the faces of God

The Shvetashvatara belongs to the Taittiriya school of the Black Yajur Veda and is named after a family rather than a doctrine; the name means one who has a white horse, and the tradition reads it as one whose senses are pure, taking the horse for the senses as the Katha does. It is entirely in verse, it uses the vocabulary of classical Sankhya, and it addresses a personal God — first under the Vedic names Rudra and Isha, then by the name Shiva. All three marks make it late. It begins with a list of questions that has no parallel in the collection.

ब्रह्मवादिनो वदन्ति किं कारणं ब्रह्म कुतः स्म जाताः ।
जीवाम केन क्व च सम्प्रतिष्ठा अधिष्ठिताः केन सुखेतरेषु ।
कालः स्वभावो नियतिर्यदृच्छा भूतानि योनिः पुरुष इति चिन्त्या ।
संयोग एषां न त्वात्मभावादात्माप्यनीशः सुखदुःखहेतोः ।
ते ध्यानयोगानुगता अपश्यन् देवात्मशक्तिं स्वगुणैर्निगूढाम् ।
यः कारणानि निखिलानि तानि कालात्मयुक्तान्यधितिष्ठत्येकः ।
brahmavādino vadanti kiṃ kāraṇaṃ brahma kutaḥ sma jātāḥ
jīvāma kena kva ca sampratiṣṭhā adhiṣṭhitāḥ kena sukhetareṣu
1.2
kālaḥ svabhāvo niyatiryadṛcchā bhūtāni yoniḥ puruṣa iti cintyā
saṃyoga eṣāṃ na tvātmabhāvādātmāpyanīśaḥ sukhaduḥkhahetoḥ
1.3
te dhyānayogānugatā apaśyan devātmaśaktiṃ svaguṇairnigūḍhām
yaḥ kāraṇāni nikhilāni tāni kālātmayuktānyadhitiṣṭhatyekaḥ

1.1Those who speak of Brahman say: what is the cause? Brahman? From what are we born? By what do we live? On what are we founded? Governed by whom do we live in pleasure and its opposite? Time, own-nature, necessity, chance, the elements, the womb, the person — these are to be considered. Not their combination, because there is a self; and the self too has no power over the cause of pleasure and pain. Those who followed the discipline of meditation saw the self-power of the god, hidden by its own qualities, who alone governs all those causes, from time to the self.

Seven candidates, all refused time own nature necessity chance the elements the womb the person or their combination each is inside the series even the self has no power over the cause of pleasure and pain so it cannot account for the series The questions that open the text ask what the cause is, where we come from and what governs pleasure and pain. What the sages are said to have seen is not on the list; they saw it in meditation, not by elimination.
Figure 42.51 — The seven candidates of verse 1.2 and what disqualifies them. The last is the hardest to rule out, and the verse rules it out with the same argument as the rest.

Seven candidate causes are named in verse 2 and all seven are rejected, including the two that the surrounding philosophies were built on, svabhava, a thing's own nature, and kala, time. The reason given is the same for each: a cause that is itself part of the series cannot account for the series, and the self, being subject to pleasure and pain, is inside it too. The term the sages are said to have seen, devatmashakti, is one compound of three words, and the translator Tyagisananda read the three as independently meaningful, giving the god of religion, the self of philosophy and the energy of science. Easwaran follows him. Other translators read one word.

वह्नेर्यथा योनिगतस्य मूर्तिर्न दृश्यते नैव च लिङ्गनाशः ।
स भूय एवेन्धनयोनिगृह्यस्तद्वोभयं वै प्रणवेन देहे ।
स्वदेहमरणिं कृत्वा प्रणवं चोत्तरारणिम् ।
ध्याननिर्मथनाभ्यासाद्देवं पश्येन्निगूढवत् ।
सर्वव्यापिनमात्मानं क्षीरे सर्पिरिवार्पितम् ।
आत्मविद्यातपोमूलं तद्ब्रह्मोपनिषत् परम् ।
vahneryathā yonigatasya mūrtirna dṛśyate naiva ca liṅganāśaḥ
sa bhūya evendhanayonigṛhyastadvobhayaṃ vai praṇavena dehe
1.14
svadehamaraṇiṃ kṛtvā praṇavaṃ cottarāraṇim
dhyānanirmathanābhyāsāddevaṃ paśyennigūḍhavat
1.16
sarvavyāpinamātmānaṃ kṣīre sarpirivārpitam
ātmavidyātapomūlaṃ tadbrahmopaniṣat param

1.13As the form of fire in its source is not seen and yet its mark is not destroyed, and it may be seized again in its source, the fuel — so both are in the body by means of OM. Making one's own body the lower firestick and OM the upper, one should see the god as hidden, by the practice of the churning that is meditation. The Self pervading all, as butter is set in milk, rooted in self-knowledge and discipline — that is the highest secret of Brahman.

The firesticks are the text's instruction and they are a piece of technology. A Vedic fire was started by twirling an upper stick in a socket cut in a lower one, and the work was hard enough that the priest was permitted to change places with his wife when tired. The word for the practice, abhyasa, is the same word the Gita uses for what makes any discipline work, and what the comparison insists on is the labour. The fire is already in the wood and no amount of that fact lights it.

The fire is already in the wood the lower stick: one's own body the upper stick: the syllable OM the churning that is meditation the god, seen where he was hidden The priest was allowed to change places with his wife when the twirling tired him. The comparison insists on the labour: being in the wood does not light the fire.
Figure 42.52 — Verses 1.13 and 1.14. The fire is in the wood already; what the figure shows is the labour that gets it out.
वेदाहमेतं पुरुषं महान्तमादित्यवर्णं तमसः परस्तात् ।
तमेव विदित्वातिमृत्युमेति नान्यः पन्था विद्यतेऽयनाय ।
सर्वानन शिरोग्रीवः सर्वभूतगुहाशयः
सर्वव्यापी स भगवांस्तस्मात् सर्वगतः शिवः
नवद्वारे पुरे देही हंसो लेलायते बहिः ।
वशी सर्वस्य लोकस्य स्थावरस्य चरस्य च ।
अपाणिपादो जवनो ग्रहीता पश्यत्यचक्षुः स शृणोत्यकर्णः ।
स वेत्ति वेद्यं न च तस्यास्ति वेत्ता तमाहुरग्र्यं पुरुषं महान्तम् ।
vedāhametaṃ puruṣaṃ mahāntamādityavarṇaṃ tamasaḥ parastāt
tameva viditvātimṛtyumeti nānyaḥ panthā vidyate'yanāya
3.11
sarvānana śirogrīvaḥ sarvabhūtaguhāśayaḥ
sarvavyāpī sa bhagavāṃstasmāt sarvagataḥ śivaḥ
3.18
navadvāre pure dehī haṃso lelāyate bahiḥ
vaśī sarvasya lokasya sthāvarasya carasya ca
3.19
apāṇipādo javano grahītā paśyatyacakṣuḥ sa śṛṇotyakarṇaḥ
sa vetti vedyaṃ na ca tasyāsti vettā tamāhuragryaṃ puruṣaṃ mahāntam

3.8I have known this great person, the colour of the sun, beyond darkness. Knowing him alone one goes past death. There is no other road to travel. Whose face and head and neck are everywhere, who lies in the cave of every being, pervading all — he is the Lord, and therefore the all-present and kindly one. In the city of nine gates the body-dweller, the swan, moves out and in. He is the ruler of the whole world, of what stands and what moves. Without hands or feet, he is swift and a grasper; he sees without eyes, he hears without ears. He knows what is to be known, and there is nobody who knows him. They call him the first, the great person.

Verse 8 is where the text changes register. It is a first-person report, not a doctrine: veda aham, I have known, and the last line refuses every alternative road. The adjective in verse 11 is shiva, kindly, and by this point in the text the tradition takes it as a name; Deussen and others hold that the word is still an adjective and that the personal name arrives later. What is not in dispute is the direction of travel. The nine-gated city of verse 18 is the Katha's eleven-gated one with the two openings at the crown and the navel left out.

द्वा सुपर्णा सयुजा सखाया समानं वृक्षं परिषस्वजाते ।
तयोरन्यः पिप्पलं स्वाद्वत्त्यनश्नन्नन्यो अभिचाकशीति ।
समाने वृक्षे पुरुषो निमग्नोऽनीशया शोचति मुह्यमानः ।
जुष्टं यदा पश्यत्यन्यमीशमस्य महिमानमिति वीतशोकः ।
मायां तु प्रकृतिं विद्यान्मायिनं च महेश्वरम् ।
तस्यावयवभूतैस्तु व्याप्तं सर्वमिदं जगत् ।
dvā suparṇā sayujā sakhāyā samānaṃ vṛkṣaṃ pariṣasvajāte
tayoranyaḥ pippalaṃ svādvattyanaśnannanyo abhicākaśīti
4.7
samāne vṛkṣe puruṣo nimagno'nīśayā śocati muhyamānaḥ
juṣṭaṃ yadā paśyatyanyamīśamasya mahimānamiti vītaśokaḥ
4.10
māyāṃ tu prakṛtiṃ vidyānmāyinaṃ ca maheśvaram
tasyāvayavabhūtaistu vyāptaṃ sarvamidaṃ jagat

4.6Two birds, companions and friends, cling to the same tree. One of them eats the sweet fig; the other looks on without eating. On the same tree a person is sunk, grieving in helplessness, bewildered. When he sees the other, the lord, content, and his greatness, he is free of sorrow. Know nature to be the magic, and the great lord to be the magician. This whole world is filled with things that are parts of him.

Two birds on one tree the same tree one eats the fig sweet and not sweet the other looks on and does not eat he grieves until he notices The Mundaka and the Shvetashvatara carry the verse unchanged; it is older than either of them. Nothing happens to the tree or to the fruit. What changes is that the eater notices.
Figure 42.53 — The verse the Mundaka and the Shvetashvatara share. Two birds, one tree, one difference, and the release described in the second verse changes nothing about the tree.

The two birds are a verse of the Rig Veda that both this text and the Mundaka take over unchanged, and the second verse is the one that does the work. Nothing happens to the tree and nothing happens to the fruit. What changes is that the eater notices the other bird, and the grief he is described as feeling is called anisha, without power, which is the same word the first chapter used of the self that could not be the cause. Verse 10 supplies the term the later tradition took from this text above all others: maya is nature considered as a display, and the one who displays it is the lord. Nagler's gloss, which Easwaran uses throughout, is that the appearance in question is not the world but the separateness.

The display, and the one who displays it the word what it names what it does not mean maya nature, taken as a display not that the world is unreal mayin the great lord who displays not a conjuror outside it the appearance the separateness, says Nagler and that is what is dissolved The world is said to be filled with things that are parts of him. The term the later tradition took from this text above every other.
Figure 42.54 — Verse 4.10. What the word names, and what it is repeatedly taken to mean and does not.
एको देवः सर्वभूतेषु गूढः सर्वव्यापी सर्वभूतान्तरात्मा ।
कर्माध्यक्षः सर्वभूताधिवासः साक्षी चेता केवलो निर्गुणश्च ।
एको वशी निष्क्रियाणां बहूनामेकं बीजं बहुधा यः करोति ।
तमात्मस्थं येऽनुपश्यन्ति धीरास्तेषां सुखं शाश्वतं नेतरेषाम् ।
यदा चर्मवदाकाशं वेष्टयिष्यन्ति मानवाः ।
तदा देवमविज्ञाय दुःखस्यान्तो भविष्यति ।
यस्य देवे परा भक्तिर्यथा देवे तथा गुरौ ।
तस्यैते कथिता ह्यर्थाः प्रकाशन्ते महात्मनः ।
eko devaḥ sarvabhūteṣu gūḍhaḥ sarvavyāpī sarvabhūtāntarātmā
karmādhyakṣaḥ sarvabhūtādhivāsaḥ sākṣī cetā kevalo nirguṇaśca
6.12
eko vaśī niṣkriyāṇāṃ bahūnāmekaṃ bījaṃ bahudhā yaḥ karoti
tamātmasthaṃ ye'nupaśyanti dhīrāsteṣāṃ sukhaṃ śāśvataṃ netareṣām
6.20
yadā carmavadākāśaṃ veṣṭayiṣyanti mānavāḥ
tadā devamavijñāya duḥkhasyānto bhaviṣyati
6.23
yasya deve parā bhaktiryathā deve tathā gurau
tasyaite kathitā hyarthāḥ prakāśante mahātmanaḥ

6.11One god, hidden in all beings, pervading all, the inner self of all beings, overseer of works, dwelling in all beings, the witness, the knower, alone and without qualities. The one ruler of the many who do not act, who makes one seed into many — the wise who see him standing in the self have lasting happiness, and no others. When men roll up space as if it were a skin, then, without knowing the god, there will be an end to sorrow. For one who has the highest love for God, and as for God so for his teacher, these things spoken of shine out.

The figure in verse 20 is an impossibility used as a measure: sorrow will end without this knowledge on the day the sky can be rolled up like a hide. The last verse of the text is the one Shankara quoted most from it, and it is the earliest place in the collection where bhakti, love, is named as the condition of understanding — and named twice, once for God and once for the teacher, in the same measure.

Mundaka: the two knowledges

The Mundaka belongs to the Atharva Veda. Its name is from munda, shaved, which may point to an order of ascetics for whom it was meant, or, as the commentary prefers, to those shorn of attachment to what is not the Self. Its six sections are counted straight through here. It is the most quoted of the Upanishads in modern India, because four of its words were made the motto of the republic, and it is the most balanced in construction: a lineage, a question, a distinction, a cosmogony, a method, a result.

शौनको ह वै महाशालोऽङ्गिरसं विधिवदुपसन्नः पप्रच्छ
कस्मिन्नु भगवो विज्ञाते सर्वमिदं विज्ञातं भवतीति
तस्मै स होवाच
द्वे विद्ये वेदितव्ये इति ह स्म
यद्ब्रह्मविदो वदन्ति परा चैवापरा च
तत्रापरा ऋग्वेदो यजुर्वेदः सामवेदोऽथर्ववेदः
शिक्षा कल्पो व्याकरणं निरुक्तं छन्दो ज्योतिषमिति
अथ परा यया तदक्षरमधिगम्यते
śaunako ha vai mahāśālo'ṅgirasaṃ vidhivadupasannaḥ papraccha
kasminnu bhagavo vijñāte sarvamidaṃ vijñātaṃ bhavatīti
1.4
tasmai sa hovāca
dve vidye veditavye iti ha sma
yadbrahmavido vadanti parā caivāparā ca
1.5
tatrāparā ṛgvedo yajurvedaḥ sāmavedo'tharvavedaḥ
śikṣā kalpo vyākaraṇaṃ niruktaṃ chando jyotiṣamiti
atha parā yayā tadakṣaramadhigamyate

1.3Shaunaka, a great householder, approached Angiras in the proper way and asked: what is it, sir, by knowing which all this becomes known? He said to him: two knowledges are to be known, so say those who know Brahman — the higher and the lower. Of these the lower is the Rig Veda, the Yajur Veda, the Sama Veda, the Atharva Veda, pronunciation, ritual, grammar, etymology, metre and astronomy. The higher is that by which the imperishable is reached.

Two knowledges, and where the Vedas fall the lower: not beyond the four Vedas pronunciation, ritual grammar, etymology metre, astronomy all of it can be taught and examined the higher: beyond that by which the imperishable is reached named by its object, never by its method one item, and no syllabus for it The division is not between sacred and secular learning: the four Vedas are on the lower side. Shaunaka's question was what one thing, known, makes everything known.
Figure 42.55 — The division of verse 1.4. Everything on the left can be taught and examined; what is on the right is defined by its object and not by its method.

The list of the lower knowledge is everything the Vedic schools taught, and it is put in second place by the text that is itself part of it. The words are para and apara, beyond and not beyond, and the distinction is not between religious and secular learning. The four Vedas are on the lower side. What is on the higher side is defined only by what it reaches, which is why Nagler prefers to call it realization rather than knowledge.

यत्तदद्रेश्यमग्राह्यमगोत्रमवर्णमचक्षुःश्रोत्रं तदपाणिपादम् ।
नित्यं विभुं सर्वगतं सुसूक्ष्मं तदव्ययं यद्भूतयोनिं परिपश्यन्ति धीराः ।
यथोर्णनाभिः सृजते गृह्णते च यथा पृथिव्यामोषधयः सम्भवन्ति ।
यथा सतः पुरुषात्केशलोमानि तथाक्षरात्सम्भवतीह विश्वम् ।
yattadadreśyamagrāhyamagotramavarṇamacakṣuḥśrotraṃ tadapāṇipādam
nityaṃ vibhuṃ sarvagataṃ susūkṣmaṃ tadavyayaṃ yadbhūtayoniṃ paripaśyanti dhīrāḥ
1.7
yathorṇanābhiḥ sṛjate gṛhṇate ca yathā pṛthivyāmoṣadhayaḥ sambhavanti
yathā sataḥ puruṣātkeśalomāni tathākṣarātsambhavatīha viśvam

1.6That which is not to be seen, not to be grasped, without family or class, without eye or ear, without hands or feet, everlasting, all-pervading, present everywhere, very fine, undecaying — the wise see it as the womb of beings. As the spider puts out and draws in, as plants come up from the earth, as hair grows from a living man, so the whole world comes here from the imperishable.

The three comparisons in verse 7 are chosen for one property. Nothing outside is used in any of them: the spider's thread is the spider, the plant is the earth, the hair is the man. The clause about drawing in is not decoration either, since the same act runs in both directions and no separate destruction is needed. The words denied in verse 6, gotra and varna, are the two social categories by which people place one another, and the denial reads as metaphysics and as something else at the same time.

Four comparisons, chosen for one property the source what comes out of it what was added the spider the thread, put out and drawn in nothing: the thread is the spider the earth the plants that come up nothing a living man the hair that grows nothing a well-lit fire sparks, by the thousand nothing, and they are of its kind The clause about drawing in matters: the same act runs in both directions. No separate destruction is needed, and no material is brought in from anywhere.
Figure 42.56 — Verses 1.7 and 3.1. Four sources, four things that come out of them, and nothing brought in from anywhere.
प्लवा ह्येते अदृढा यज्ञरूपा अष्टादशोक्तमवरं येषु कर्म ।
एतच्छ्रेयो येऽभिनन्दन्ति मूढा जरामृत्युं ते पुनरेवापि यन्ति ।
अविद्यायामन्तरे वर्तमानाः स्वयं धीराः पण्डितंमन्यमानाः ।
जङ्घन्यमानाः परियन्ति मूढा अन्धेनैव नीयमाना यथान्धाः ।
परीक्ष्य लोकान् कर्मचितान् ब्राह्मणो निर्वेदमायान्नास्त्यकृतः कृतेन ।
तद्विज्ञानार्थं स गुरुमेवाभिगच्छेत् समित्पाणिः श्रोत्रियं ब्रह्मनिष्ठम् ।
plavā hyete adṛḍhā yajñarūpā aṣṭādaśoktamavaraṃ yeṣu karma
etacchreyo ye'bhinandanti mūḍhā jarāmṛtyuṃ te punarevāpi yanti
2.8
avidyāyāmantare vartamānāḥ svayaṃ dhīrāḥ paṇḍitaṃmanyamānāḥ
jaṅghanyamānāḥ pariyanti mūḍhā andhenaiva nīyamānā yathāndhāḥ
2.12
parīkṣya lokān karmacitān brāhmaṇo nirvedamāyānnāstyakṛtaḥ kṛtena
tadvijñānārthaṃ sa gurumevābhigacchet samitpāṇiḥ śrotriyaṃ brahmaniṣṭham

2.7These rafts are weak — the eighteen forms of sacrifice in which the lower work is told. Those fools who welcome this as the better go again to old age and death. Living in the middle of ignorance, wise in their own eyes, thinking themselves learned, the fools go round and round, battered, like blind men led by one who is blind. Having examined the worlds got by works, a brahmin should come to indifference: what is not made is not got by what is made. For the knowledge of that he should go, fuel in hand, to a teacher who has heard and who is settled in Brahman.

Verse 7 is the harshest sentence in the collection about the religion the collection is attached to. The eighteen are the sixteen priests of the great sacrifice with the patron and his wife, and the word for what they are is plava, a raft or float, with adridha, not firm, beside it. Verse 12 states the reason in one clause that is also a rule of logic: nasty akritah kritena, what is not made is not obtained by what is made, and no quantity of works alters the kind of thing works produce.

यथा सुदीप्तात्पावकाद्विस्फुलिङ्गाः सहस्रशः प्रभवन्ते सरूपाः ।
तथाक्षराद्विविधाः सोम्य भावाः प्रजायन्ते तत्र चैवापियन्ति ।
धनुर्गृहीत्वौपनिषदं महास्त्रं शरं ह्युपासानिशितं सन्धयीत ।
आयम्य तद्भावगतेन चेतसा लक्ष्यं तदेवाक्षरं सोम्य विद्धि ।
प्रणवो धनुः शरो ह्यात्मा ब्रह्म तल्लक्ष्यमुच्यते
अप्रमत्तेन वेद्धव्यं शरवत्तन्मयो भवेत्
yathā sudīptātpāvakādvisphuliṅgāḥ sahasraśaḥ prabhavante sarūpāḥ
tathākṣarādvividhāḥ somya bhāvāḥ prajāyante tatra caivāpiyanti
4.3
dhanurgṛhītvaupaniṣadaṃ mahāstraṃ śaraṃ hyupāsāniśitaṃ sandhayīta
āyamya tadbhāvagatena cetasā lakṣyaṃ tadevākṣaraṃ somya viddhi
4.4
praṇavo dhanuḥ śaro hyātmā brahma tallakṣyamucyate
apramattena veddhavyaṃ śaravattanmayo bhavet

3.1As from a well-lit fire sparks of the same kind come forth by the thousand, so, dear one, various beings are born from the imperishable, and go back into it. Taking the great weapon, the bow of the mystical teaching, one should fit to it the arrow sharpened by worship. Drawing it with a mind gone to the same being, know the target to be the imperishable, dear one. OM is the bow; the self is the arrow; Brahman is called the target. It is to be pierced by one who is not careless. Like the arrow, one should become one with it.

The image given twice, with the terms moved first telling bow: the scriptures arrow: devotion string: meditation target: the Lord second telling bow: OM arrow: the archer string: meditation target: become it Between the two verses the man doing the shooting changes places with the thing shot. The instruction is not to hit the target but, like the arrow, to become one with it. The word for the bow in the first telling means any text of mystical truth, not a named book.
Figure 42.57 — The two forms of the image in verses 4.3 and 4.4. Between them the archer changes places with the arrow, and the target stops being a place one hits.

The image is given twice and the terms move. In the first version the archer holds a bow made of scripture and shoots devotion at God. In the second the bow is OM, the arrow is the person doing the shooting, and the instruction is not to hit the target but to become it. The word in the first version is aupanishadam, of the upanishads, which the commentary takes to mean any text of mystical truth rather than a named book.

द्वा सुपर्णा सयुजा सखाया समानं वृक्षं परिषस्वजाते
तयोरन्यः पिप्पलं स्वाद्वत्त्यनश्नन्नन्यो अभिचाकशीति
समाने वृक्षे पुरुषो निमग्नोऽनीशया शोचति मुह्यमानः ।
जुष्टं यदा पश्यत्यन्यमीशमस्य महिमानमिति वीतशोकः ।
यदा पश्यः पश्यते रुक्मवर्णं कर्तारमीशं पुरुषं ब्रह्मयोनिम् ।
तदा विद्वान् पुण्यपापे विधूय निरञ्जनः परमं साम्यमुपैति ।
सत्यमेव जयते नानृतं सत्येन पन्था विततो देवयानः ।
येनाक्रमन्त्यृषयो ह्याप्तकामा यत्र तत्सत्यस्य परमं निधानम् ।
dvā suparṇā sayujā sakhāyā samānaṃ vṛkṣaṃ pariṣasvajāte
tayoranyaḥ pippalaṃ svādvattyanaśnannanyo abhicākaśīti
5.2
samāne vṛkṣe puruṣo nimagno'nīśayā śocati muhyamānaḥ
juṣṭaṃ yadā paśyatyanyamīśamasya mahimānamiti vītaśokaḥ
5.3
yadā paśyaḥ paśyate rukmavarṇaṃ kartāramīśaṃ puruṣaṃ brahmayonim
tadā vidvān puṇyapāpe vidhūya nirañjanaḥ paramaṃ sāmyamupaiti
5.6
satyameva jayate nānṛtaṃ satyena panthā vitato devayānaḥ
yenākramantyṛṣayo hyāptakāmā yatra tatsatyasya paramaṃ nidhānam

5.1Two birds, companions and friends, cling to the same tree. One of them eats the sweet fig; the other looks on without eating. On the same tree a person is sunk, grieving in helplessness, bewildered. When he sees the other, the lord, content, and his greatness, he is free of sorrow. When the seer sees the golden-coloured one, the maker, the lord, the person, the womb of Brahman, then the knower shakes off good and evil, and, stainless, reaches the highest likeness. Truth alone wins, not untruth. By truth the road is laid out, the road the gods go, by which the sages, having got what they wanted, climb to where the highest treasure of truth is.

The four words of verse 6 are on the seal of the Indian republic, and what is usually cut from the quotation is the second half, which says what the winning consists of: a road, and people walking on it. The word for untruth is anritam, which carries the sense of being out of the rhythm, rita, of things. Gandhi's use of the verse turned on the older sense of sat: it means the true, the real and the good at once, so that what is false is also what does not exist, and what does not exist cannot win.

न चक्षुषा गृह्यते नापि वाचा नान्यैर्देवैस्तपसा कर्मणा वा ।
ज्ञानप्रसादेन विशुद्धसत्त्वस्ततस्तु तं पश्यते निष्कलं ध्यायमानः ।
नायमात्मा प्रवचनेन लभ्यो
न मेधया न बहुना श्रुतेन
यमेवैष वृणुते तेन लभ्य-
स्तस्यैष आत्मा विवृणुते तनूं स्वाम्
यथा नद्यः स्यन्दमानाः समुद्रेऽस्तं गच्छन्ति नामरूपे विहाय ।
तथा विद्वान् नामरूपाद्विमुक्तः परात्परं पुरुषमुपैति दिव्यम् ।
स यो ह वै तत्परमं ब्रह्म वेद ब्रह्मैव भवति ।
तरति शोकं तरति पाप्मानं गुहाग्रन्थिभ्यो विमुक्तोऽमृतो भवति ।
na cakṣuṣā gṛhyate nāpi vācā nānyairdevaistapasā karmaṇā vā
jñānaprasādena viśuddhasattvastatastu taṃ paśyate niṣkalaṃ dhyāyamānaḥ
6.3
nāyamātmā pravacanena labhyo
na medhayā na bahunā śrutena
yamevaiṣa vṛṇute tena labhya-
stasyaiṣa ātmā vivṛṇute tanūṃ svām
6.8
yathā nadyaḥ syandamānāḥ samudre'staṃ gacchanti nāmarūpe vihāya
tathā vidvān nāmarūpādvimuktaḥ parātparaṃ puruṣamupaiti divyam
6.9
sa yo ha vai tatparamaṃ brahma veda brahmaiva bhavati
tarati śokaṃ tarati pāpmānaṃ guhāgranthibhyo vimukto'mṛto bhavati

5.8He is not grasped by the eye, nor by speech, nor by the other powers, nor by austerity or work. By the clearness of knowing, one whose being has been made pure sees the undivided one, meditating. This Self is not to be won by teaching, nor by intelligence, nor by much hearing. It is won by the one whom it chooses; to that one the Self uncovers its own body. As rivers, flowing, go to their setting in the sea, leaving name and shape behind, so the knower, freed from name and shape, reaches the divine person beyond the beyond. Whoever knows that highest Brahman becomes Brahman. He crosses sorrow, he crosses wrong, and, freed from the knots in the cave of the heart, becomes deathless.

Verse 64.3 is the Katha's verse, word for word, and it is the clearest case in the collection of a line that belongs to no one text. The rivers in verse 8 are the same rivers the Chandogya used, but the point is different: there the fish was that the rivers do not know, here that what is lost is nama-rupa, name and shape, which is exactly the pair the Chandogya's clay and gold had already identified as the only thing distinguishing one pot from another.

What is left behind at the sea a river flowing east a river flowing west a river from the hills the sea name and shape left at the mouth The Chandogya used the same rivers to say the creatures do not know they have merged. Here the point is what is dropped: nama-rupa, the only thing that told them apart.
Figure 42.58 — Verse 6.8. What the river loses at the mouth is exactly what distinguished one river from another.

Mandukya: consciousness and its phases

The Mandukya is the shortest of the principal Upanishads, twelve sentences of prose, and Shankara said that if one could study only one, it should be this. Its second sentence carries one of the four great formulae, ayam atma brahma, this Self is Brahman. It belongs to the Atharva Veda, like the other texts that centre their teaching on OM. Its name probably comes from manduka, frog, as the Taittiriya's comes from a bird, though it may simply have been the name of the sage. It was and is held to be the hardest of them to construe accurately, and it acquired the most consequential commentary in the tradition: Gaudapada, the teacher of Shankara's teacher, wrote two hundred and fifteen verses on it, the earliest exposition of Vedanta that survives, and one that argues its case on intellectual grounds without leaning on scriptural authority.

ओमित्येतदक्षरमिदं सर्वं तस्योपव्याख्यानं
भूतं भवद् भविष्यदिति सर्वमोङ्कार एव
यच्चान्यत् त्रिकालातीतं तदप्योङ्कार एव ॥ १ ॥
सर्वं ह्येतद् ब्रह्मायमात्मा ब्रह्म सोऽयमात्मा चतुष्पात् ॥ २ ॥
omityetadakṣaramidaṃ sarvaṃ tasyopavyākhyānaṃ
bhūtaṃ bhavad bhaviṣyaditi sarvamoṅkāra eva
yaccānyat trikālātītaṃ tadapyoṅkāra eva
2
sarvaṃ hyetad brahmāyamātmā brahma so'yamātmā catuṣpāt

1OM: this syllable is all this. Its explanation is this — what was, what is and what will be, all of it is OM; and whatever else there is beyond the three times, that too is OM. For all this is Brahman. This Self is Brahman. This Self has four quarters.

The word rendered as quarters is pada, foot, and the expression is literally that the Self is four-footed. It is used of the cosmos as well, which is said to have stood on the four feet of Brahman at the beginning of a cycle and now to totter on one. The text then walks through the four in order.

जागरितस्थानो बहिष्प्रज्ञः सप्ताङ्ग एकोनविंशतिमुखः
स्थूलभुग्वैश्वानरः प्रथमः पादः ॥ ३ ॥
स्वप्नस्थानोऽन्तःप्रज्ञः सप्ताङ्ग एकोनविंशतिमुखः
प्रविविक्तभुक्तैजसो द्वितीयः पादः ॥ ४ ॥
यत्र सुप्तो न कञ्चन कामं कामयते न कञ्चन स्वप्नं
पश्यति तत् सुषुप्तम् । सुषुप्तस्थान एकीभूतः प्रज्ञानघन
एवानन्दमयो ह्यानन्दभुक् चेतोमुखः प्राज्ञस्तृतीयः पादः ॥ ५ ॥
एष सर्वेश्वरः एष सर्वज्ञ एषोऽन्तर्याम्येष योनिः सर्वस्य
प्रभवाप्ययौ हि भूतानाम् ॥ ६ ॥
jāgaritasthāno bahiṣprajñaḥ saptāṅga ekonaviṃśatimukhaḥ
sthūlabhugvaiśvānaraḥ prathamaḥ pādaḥ
4
svapnasthāno'ntaḥprajñaḥ saptāṅga ekonaviṃśatimukhaḥ
praviviktabhuktaijaso dvitīyaḥ pādaḥ
5
yatra supto na kañcana kāmaṃ kāmayate na kañcana svapnaṃ
paśyati tat suṣuptam | suṣuptasthāna ekībhūtaḥ prajñānaghana
evānandamayo hyānandabhuk cetomukhaḥ prājñastṛtīyaḥ pādaḥ
6
eṣa sarveśvaraḥ eṣa sarvajña eṣo'ntaryāmyeṣa yoniḥ sarvasya
prabhavāpyayau hi bhūtānām

3The waking state, knowing what is outside, seven-limbed, nineteen-mouthed, eating the gross: Vaishvanara, the first quarter. The dream state, knowing what is inside, seven-limbed, nineteen-mouthed, eating the fine: Taijasa, the second quarter. Where one asleep desires no desire and sees no dream, that is deep sleep. The deep-sleep state, become one, a single mass of knowing, made of bliss, eating bliss, whose mouth is thought: Prajna, the third quarter. This is the lord of all, this the knower of all, this the inner controller. This is the womb of all, the coming forth and the going back of beings.

The seven limbs and nineteen mouths are one of the standard tallies of the organs of action and perception. Vaishvanara is made of vishva, all, and nara, man; Shankara reads it as the one who leads all men to their enjoyments. Taijasa is from tejas, a word for the splendour of awareness that can also mean sexual energy. Prajna is from jna, to know, with an intensifying prefix. What is striking about the sixth sentence is that the third state is suddenly described as a being rather than a state — lord, knower, inner controller — and the reason Nagler gives is that of the three states available before illumination, deep sleep is the one in which the Self is closest to what it is. The mind and body do rest in it, as sleep research finds, but the sleeper is not aware of the rest.

नान्तःप्रज्ञं न बहिष्प्रज्ञं नोभयतःप्रज्ञं न प्रज्ञानघनं
न प्रज्ञं नाप्रज्ञम् । अदृष्टमव्यवहार्यमग्राह्यमलक्षणं
अचिन्त्यमव्यपदेश्यमेकात्मप्रत्ययसारं प्रपञ्चोपशमं
शान्तं शिवमद्वैतं चतुर्थं मन्यन्ते स आत्मा स विज्ञेयः ॥ ७ ॥
nāntaḥprajñaṃ na bahiṣprajñaṃ nobhayataḥprajñaṃ na prajñānaghanaṃ
na prajñaṃ nāprajñam | adṛṣṭamavyavahāryamagrāhyamalakṣaṇaṃ
acintyamavyapadeśyamekātmapratyayasāraṃ prapañcopaśamaṃ
śāntaṃ śivamadvaitaṃ caturthaṃ manyante sa ātmā sa vijñeyaḥ

7Not knowing what is inside, not knowing what is outside, not knowing both, not a mass of knowing, not knowing, not unknowing; unseen, not to be dealt with, not to be grasped, without a mark, not to be thought, not to be pointed at, whose essence is the certainty of the one Self, in which the spread-out world has come to rest, quiet, kindly, without a second: the fourth is what they hold this to be. That is the Self. That is what is to be known.

The seventh sentence is the centre of the text and it is written entirely in denials. Six of them are about knowing and rule out every position on the map that the first three quarters have just laid down: it is not inward knowing, not outward knowing, not both at once, not the undifferentiated mass of knowing that deep sleep is, not knowing and not its absence. Six more deny it every handle by which anything is usually taken hold of — sight, transaction, grasp, mark, thought, reference. Only then do three positive words arrive, and they are shanta, shiva, advaita: quiet, kindly, without a second. Turiya means the fourth and nothing more; Nagler is explicit that it is not a fourth state of consciousness alongside the others but consciousness itself, and that the ordinal records only the order in which one arrives.

Three quarters, three sounds, and the ground they stand on state name what it eats sound waking, knowing outward Vaishvanara the gross a dream, knowing inward Taijasa the fine u deep sleep, no dream Prajna bliss, in one mass m the fourth: not a state beside these but what they are made of without parts, and so the silence that the three sounds are spoken in a is first and waking is first; u lies between; m closes the utterance.
Figure 42.59 — The four quarters of sentences 3 to 7 and the three sounds they are mapped onto in sentences 8 to 12. The fourth is drawn as the ground of the other three rather than a fourth alongside them.
The seventh sentence closes every approach in turn six denials about knowing, matching the three quarters just defined not knowing inward not knowing outward not knowing both not a mass of knowing not knowing not unknowing six denials about handling: every way of taking hold of anything unseen not to be dealt with not to be grasped without a mark not to be thought not to be pointed at quiet kindly without a second what is left The three words that survive are not a description. They are the residue of twelve refusals. Turiya means the fourth and nothing else: it records the order of arrival, not a place in a series.
Figure 42.60 — The seventh sentence, drawn as what it does. Twelve denials close every approach in turn; the three words that remain are not descriptions but the residue.
सोऽयमात्माध्यक्षरमोङ्कारोऽधिमात्रं पादा मात्रा मात्राश्च पादा
अकार उकारो मकार इति ॥ ८ ॥
जागरितस्थानो वैश्वानरोऽकारः प्रथमा मात्राऽऽप्तेरादिमत्त्वाद्
वाऽऽप्नोति ह वै सर्वान् कामानादिश्च भवति य एवं वेद ॥ ९ ॥
स्वप्नस्थानस्तैजस उकारो द्वितीया मात्रोत्कर्षात्
उभयत्वाद्वोत्कर्षति ह वै ज्ञानसन्ततिं समानश्च भवति
नास्याब्रह्मवित्कुले भवति य एवं वेद ॥ १० ॥
सुषुप्तस्थानः प्राज्ञो मकारस्तृतीया मात्रा मितेरपीतेर्वा
मिनोति ह वा इदं सर्वमपीतिश्च भवति य एवं वेद ॥ ११ ॥
अमात्रश्चतुर्थोऽव्यवहार्यः प्रपञ्चोपशमः शिवोऽद्वैत
एवमोङ्कार आत्मैव संविशत्यात्मनाऽऽत्मानं य एवं वेद ॥ १२ ॥
so'yamātmādhyakṣaramoṅkāro'dhimātraṃ pādā mātrā mātrāśca pādā
akāra ukāro makāra iti
9
jāgaritasthāno vaiśvānaro'kāraḥ prathamā mātrā''pterādimattvād
vā''pnoti ha vai sarvān kāmānādiśca bhavati ya evaṃ veda
10
svapnasthānastaijasa ukāro dvitīyā mātrotkarṣāt
ubhayatvādvotkarṣati ha vai jñānasantatiṃ samānaśca bhavati
nāsyābrahmavitkule bhavati ya evaṃ veda
11
suṣuptasthānaḥ prājño makārastṛtīyā mātrā miterapītervā
minoti ha vā idaṃ sarvamapītiśca bhavati ya evaṃ veda
12
amātraścaturtho'vyavahāryaḥ prapañcopaśamaḥ śivo'dvaita
evamoṅkāra ātmaiva saṃviśatyātmanā''tmānaṃ ya evaṃ veda

8This Self, with respect to the syllable, is OM; with respect to the parts, the quarters are the sounds and the sounds the quarters — a, u and m. The waking state, Vaishvanara, is the sound a, the first part, from reaching or from being first. One who knows this reaches all desires and becomes first. The dream state, Taijasa, is the sound u, the second part, from being higher or from being between. One who knows this raises the run of his knowing, becomes even, and has in his line nobody who does not know Brahman. The deep-sleep state, Prajna, is the sound m, the third part, from measuring or from taking in. One who knows this measures all this and takes it in. The fourth is without parts, not to be dealt with, the spread-out world at rest, kindly, without a second. So OM is the Self. One who knows this enters the Self by the Self.

The second pass is the same ground taken in sound rather than in states. Each identification is justified by a pun on the sound's name, and the puns are not decoration: a is the first letter and waking the first experience, u is what lies between, m is the closure that ends the utterance, and a and u are pronounced from the throat outwards and seem to merge into m. The fourth sound is the one that is not a sound. What the arrangement offers, in Nagler's reading, is a way to climb the chain rather than only to describe it, since OM is also what is repeated, and the Mandukya's claim is that every such repetition in every tradition leads back to this one and then past it.

One utterance, and where each part of it is made a — waking first, and reaching u — dream higher, and between m — deep sleep measure, and closure the fourth no sound at all the throat opens, narrows, and closes Each identification is justified by a pun on the name of the sound, not by resemblance. a and u are sounded from the throat outwards and seem to run together into m. The fourth is not a fourth sound: it is the one that is not a sound.
Figure 42.61 — Sentences 8 to 12. One utterance taken in time, with the pun that justifies each identification.

Kena: by whom?

The Kena belongs to the Sama Veda and used to be called by its school's name, Talavakara. Its present title is its first word, and the word is a question: by whom. Shankara is said to have written two commentaries on it. It has four chapters: the first two are verse and argue, the last two are prose and tell a story. Nagler's framing is that the Kena asks the question modern science reached late: not what the world is made of but who the investigator is, and how the instrument of knowing is supposed to turn round and know itself.

केनेषितं पतति प्रेषितं मनः
केन प्राणः प्रथमः प्रैति युक्तः ।
केनेषितां वाचमिमां वदन्ति
चक्षुः श्रोत्रं क उ देवो युनक्ति ॥ १ ॥
श्रोत्रस्य श्रोत्रं मनसो मनो यद्
वाचो ह वाचं स उ प्राणस्य प्राणः ।
चक्षुषश्चक्षुरतिमुच्य धीराः
प्रेत्यास्माल्लोकादमृता भवन्ति ॥ २ ॥
keneṣitaṃ patati preṣitaṃ manaḥ
kena prāṇaḥ prathamaḥ praiti yuktaḥ
keneṣitāṃ vācamimāṃ vadanti
cakṣuḥ śrotraṃ ka u devo yunakti
1.2
śrotrasya śrotraṃ manaso mano yad
vāco ha vācaṃ sa u prāṇasya prāṇaḥ
cakṣuṣaścakṣuratimucya dhīrāḥ
pretyāsmāllokādamṛtā bhavanti

1.1By whom impelled and sent out does the mind fly to its object? By whom yoked does the first breath go on its way? By whom impelled is this speech that men speak? What god harnesses the eye and the ear? The ear of the ear, the mind of the mind, the speech of speech, the breath of the breath, the eye of the eye. Letting these go, the wise, gone from this world, become deathless.

The answer is given before the argument, and it is given as a grammatical trick that is also the whole doctrine. Whatever the ear is to sound, something stands in that relation to the ear. Shankara's paraphrase of the opening question, which Nagler quotes, is sharper than the verse: by whose mere presence does that desire arise which moves the universe. The mind is on the list of senses because in this scheme it is one, and the chief one; the word translated as sense is indriya, a power or faculty.

By whom is each of these sent the mind the breath speech the eye, the ear sent by not another faculty none is left to name the ear of the ear, the mind of the mind never itself an object The refrain runs five times with one word changed, so that no channel of knowing is left unlisted. Each verse ends by disqualifying whatever is worshipped: to set it up as an object is to make it not this.
Figure 42.62 — The Kena's question and its form. Each faculty is asked what moves it, and the answer is never another faculty; the series does not terminate in a member of itself.
न तत्र चक्षुर्गच्छति न वाग्गच्छति नो मनः ।
न विद्मो न विजानीमो यथैतदनुशिष्यात् ॥ ३ ॥
अन्यदेव तद्विदितादथो अविदितादधि ।
इति शुश्रुम पूर्वेषां ये नस्तद्व्याचचक्षिरे ॥ ४ ॥
यद्वाचाऽनभ्युदितं येन वागभ्युद्यते ।
तदेव ब्रह्म त्वं विद्धि नेदं यदिदमुपासते ॥ ५ ॥
यन्मनसा न मनुते येनाहुर्मनो मतम् ।
तदेव ब्रह्म त्वं विद्धि नेदं यदिदमुपासते ॥ ६ ॥
na tatra cakṣurgacchati na vāggacchati no manaḥ
na vidmo na vijānīmo yathaitadanuśiṣyāt
1.4
anyadeva tadviditādatho aviditādadhi
iti śuśruma pūrveṣāṃ ye nastadvyācacakṣire
1.5
yadvācā'nabhyuditaṃ yena vāgabhyudyate
tadeva brahma tvaṃ viddhi nedaṃ yadidamupāsate
1.6
yanmanasā na manute yenāhurmano matam
tadeva brahma tvaṃ viddhi nedaṃ yadidamupāsate

1.3There the eye does not go, nor speech, nor the mind. We do not know it; we do not understand how one would teach it. It is other than the known, and it is above the unknown. So we have heard from the ancients who explained it to us. That which is not spoken by speech, by which speech is spoken: know that alone to be Brahman, not this that people worship here. That which one does not think with the mind, by which, they say, the mind is thought: know that alone to be Brahman, not this that people worship here.

The admission in verse 3 is unusual and it is made in the first person plural: we do not know, and we do not see how it would be taught. What follows is not a retraction but a change of method, since verse 4 places the thing outside both of the categories a question can use. It is not among the known and it is not among the not-yet-known either, which rules out the possibility that more looking would turn it up.

Neither in the known nor in the not-yet-known what is known the eye and speech reach it what is not yet known more looking would find it looking moves things this way in neither of the two The admission is in the first person plural: we do not know how it would be taught. That is not a retraction but a change of method, since more looking will not do it.
Figure 42.63 — Verses 1.3 and 1.4. Looking moves things from the right box to the left one, which is why it cannot help here.
यच्चक्षुषा न पश्यति येन चक्षूंषि पश्यति ।
तदेव ब्रह्म त्वं विद्धि नेदं यदिदमुपासते ॥ ७ ॥
यच्छ्रोत्रेण न श‍ृणोति येन श्रोत्रमिदं श्रुतम् ।
तदेव ब्रह्म त्वं विद्धि नेदं यदिदमुपासते ॥ ८ ॥
यत्प्राणेन न प्राणिति येन प्राणः प्रणीयते ।
तदेव ब्रह्म त्वं विद्धि नेदं यदिदमुपासते ॥ ९ ॥
yaccakṣuṣā na paśyati yena cakṣūṃṣi paśyati
tadeva brahma tvaṃ viddhi nedaṃ yadidamupāsate
1.8
yacchrotreṇa na śaṛṇoti yena śrotramidaṃ śrutam
tadeva brahma tvaṃ viddhi nedaṃ yadidamupāsate
1.9
yatprāṇena na prāṇiti yena prāṇaḥ praṇīyate
tadeva brahma tvaṃ viddhi nedaṃ yadidamupāsate

1.7That which one does not see with the eye, by which the eyes are seen: know that alone to be Brahman, not this that people worship here. That which one does not hear with the ear, by which this hearing is heard: know that alone to be Brahman, not this that people worship here. That which one does not breathe with the breath, by which the breath is breathed on: know that alone to be Brahman, not this that people worship here.

The refrain runs five times, once for speech, mind, eye, ear and breath, and it is the same sentence each time with one word changed. The point of the repetition is not emphasis but coverage: every channel by which anything is ever known is enumerated and then disqualified. The second half of each verse is the sharper half. Not this that people worship here: whatever is set up as an object of worship is by that act made an object, and so is not it. Nagler sets Meister Eckhart beside it, on the people who expect to see God the way they see a cow.

यदि मन्यसे सुवेदेति दहरमेवापि
नूनं त्वं वेत्थ ब्रह्मणो रूपम् ।
यदस्य त्वं यदस्य देवेष्वथ नु
मीमांस्यमेव ते मन्ये विदितम् ॥ १ ॥
नाहं मन्ये सुवेदेति नो न वेदेति वेद च ।
यो नस्तद्वेद तद्वेद नो न वेदेति वेद च ॥ २ ॥
यस्यामतं तस्य मतं मतं यस्य न वेद सः ।
अविज्ञातं विजानतां विज्ञातमविजानताम् ॥ ३ ॥
प्रतिबोधविदितं मतममृतत्वं हि विन्दते ।
आत्मना विन्दते वीर्यं विद्यया विन्दतेऽमृतम् ॥ ४ ॥
yadi manyase suvedeti daharamevāpi
nūnaṃ tvaṃ vettha brahmaṇo rūpam
yadasya tvaṃ yadasya deveṣvatha nu
mīmāṃsyameva te manye viditam
2.2
nāhaṃ manye suvedeti no na vedeti veda ca
yo nastadveda tadveda no na vedeti veda ca
2.3
yasyāmataṃ tasya mataṃ mataṃ yasya na veda saḥ
avijñātaṃ vijānatāṃ vijñātamavijānatām
2.4
pratibodhaviditaṃ matamamṛtatvaṃ hi vindate
ātmanā vindate vīryaṃ vidyayā vindate'mṛtam

2.1If you think you know it well, then you know little indeed of Brahman's form — that of it which is yours, and that of it which is among the gods. So I think it is still to be looked into by you. I do not think I know it well; nor do I think that I do not know. I know and I do not know. Whoever among us understands that, understands it. He who thinks he does not know it, knows. He who thinks he knows it, does not. It is unknown to those who know, and known to those who do not know. It is known in an awakening, and so one finds the deathless. By oneself one finds strength, and by knowledge one finds the deathless.

The second chapter is where the Kena gets its reputation for difficulty, and the difficulty is deliberate. The teacher's opening move is to take away the student's gain: if you think you know it well, you know very little. The student's reply is not modesty but an exact report — I do not know that I know and I do not know that I do not know — and the teacher's summary in verse 3 states the rule that generates both. The word in verse 4 is pratibodha-viditam, known in an awakening: not known as a conclusion but known in the act of knowing anything at all, which is the same claim the first chapter made from the other direction.

Two claims, and which of them can be true what one thinks what follows if you think you know it well you know very little of it if you think you do not know you know The student's own reply is neither: I do not think I know, and I do not think I do not. The teacher's first move is to take the student's gain away from him. Verse 4 names the manner: pratibodha-viditam, known in an awakening, not as a conclusion.
Figure 42.64 — Verses 2.1 to 2.3. The rule that makes the two claims come out the opposite way from how they are made.
इह चेदवेदीदथ सत्यमस्ति
न चेदिहावेदीन्महती विनष्टिः ।
भूतेषु भूतेषु विचित्य धीराः
प्रेत्यास्माल्लोकादमृता भवन्ति ॥ ५ ॥
iha cedavedīdatha satyamasti
na cedihāvedīnmahatī vinaṣṭiḥ
bhūteṣu bhūteṣu vicitya dhīrāḥ
pretyāsmāllokādamṛtā bhavanti

2.5If one has known it here, then there is truth; if one has not known it here, the loss is great. Discerning it in beings and beings, the wise, gone from this world, become deathless.

Verse 5 supplies the only urgency in the text, and it is temporal. Here, in this life, or the loss is great. The word for what the wise do, vichitya, means having sorted or discriminated, and the phrase repeats the word for beings twice, which is how the Sanskrit says one by one.

ब्रह्म ह देवेभ्यो विजिग्ये तस्य ह ब्रह्मणो
विजये देवा अमहीयन्त ॥ १ ॥
त ऐक्षन्तास्माकमेवायं विजयोऽस्माकमेवायं महिमेति ।
तद्धैषां विजज्ञौ तेभ्यो ह प्रादुर्बभूव तन्न व्यजानत
किमिदं यक्षमिति ॥ २ ॥
तेऽग्निमब्रुवञ्जातवेद एतद्विजानीहि
किमिदं यक्षमिति तथेति ॥ ३ ॥
तदभ्यद्रवत्तमभ्यवदत्कोऽसीत्यग्निर्वा
अहमस्मीत्यब्रवीज्जातवेदा वा अहमस्मीति ॥ ४ ॥
brahma ha devebhyo vijigye tasya ha brahmaṇo
vijaye devā amahīyanta
3.2
ta aikṣantāsmākamevāyaṃ vijayo'smākamevāyaṃ mahimeti
taddhaiṣāṃ vijajñau tebhyo ha prādurbabhūva tanna vyajānata
kimidaṃ yakṣamiti
3.3
te'gnimabruvañjātaveda etadvijānīhi
kimidaṃ yakṣamiti tatheti
3.4
tadabhyadravattamabhyavadatko'sītyagnirvā
ahamasmītyabravījjātavedā vā ahamasmīti

3.1Brahman won a victory for the gods, and in that victory of Brahman's the gods grew great. They thought: ours alone is this victory, ours alone this greatness. It knew this of them and appeared before them, and they did not make out what this spirit was. They said to Agni: knower of all, find out what this spirit is. So be it, he said. He ran up to it. It said to him: who are you? I am Agni, he said; I am the knower of all.

The third chapter is a story and the tone changes completely. The gods have won and are congratulating themselves. A presence appears that none of them can identify, and they send their strongest in turn. The word for the presence is yaksha, which means something wondrous and, later, a nature-spirit; the text gives it no shape, and what is tested is not strength but identification.

A victory, and who took the credit for it Brahman wins for the gods the gods grow great in that victory ours alone, they thought a presence appears and none can name it The misattribution is what brings the spirit, and the rest of the story is the correction. The word for it is yaksha, something wondrous; the text gives it no shape at all.
Figure 42.65 — Verses 3.1 and 3.2. The misattribution is what summons the presence, and the rest of the chapter corrects it.
तस्मिंस्त्वयि किं वीर्यमित्यपीदं सर्वं
दहेयं यदिदं पृथिव्यामिति ॥ ५ ॥
तस्मै तृणं निदधावेतद्दहेति ।
तदुपप्रेयाय सर्वजवेन तन्न शशाक दग्धुं स तत एव
निववृते नैतदशकं विज्ञातुं यदेतद्यक्षमिति ॥ ६ ॥
अथ वायुमब्रुवन्वायवेतद्विजानीहि
किमेतद्यक्षमिति तथेति ॥ ७ ॥
तदभ्यद्रवत्तमभ्यवदत्कोऽसीति वायुर्वा
अहमस्मीत्यब्रवीन्मातरिश्वा वा अहमस्मीति ॥ ८ ॥
tasmiṃstvayi kiṃ vīryamityapīdaṃ sarvaṃ
daheyaṃ yadidaṃ pṛthivyāmiti
3.6
tasmai tṛṇaṃ nidadhāvetaddaheti
tadupapreyāya sarvajavena tanna śaśāka dagdhuṃ sa tata eva
nivavṛte naitadaśakaṃ vijñātuṃ yadetadyakṣamiti
3.7
atha vāyumabruvanvāyavetadvijānīhi
kimetadyakṣamiti tatheti
3.8
tadabhyadravattamabhyavadatko'sīti vāyurvā
ahamasmītyabravīnmātariśvā vā ahamasmīti

3.5In you, then, what power is there? Even all this that is on the earth I could burn. It laid a blade of grass before him: burn this. He went at it with all his speed and could not burn it. He came back from it: I could not find out what this spirit is. Then they said to Vayu: wind, find out what this spirit is. So be it, he said. He ran up to it. It said to him: who are you? I am Vayu, he said; I am Matarishvan.

Each god is asked the same two questions in the same order, who are you and what can you do, and each answers with a name and a maximum. Fire says he can burn everything on earth; wind says he can carry everything away. The test that follows is the maximum applied to the smallest available object, and the failure is total in both cases.

तस्मिंस्त्वयि किं वीर्यमित्यपीदं
सर्वमाददीय यदिदं पृथिव्यामिति ॥ ९ ॥
तस्मै तृणं निदधावेतदादत्स्वेति
तदुपप्रेयाय सर्वजवेन तन्न शशाकादातुं स तत एव
निववृते नैतदशकं विज्ञातुं यदेतद्यक्षमिति ॥ १० ॥
अथेन्द्रमब्रुवन्मघवन्नेतद्विजानीहि किमेतद्यक्षमिति तथेति
तदभ्यद्रवत्तस्मात्तिरोदधे ॥ ११ ॥
स तस्मिन्नेवाकाशे स्त्रियमाजगाम बहुशोभमानामुमां
हैमवतीं तांहोवाच किमेतद्यक्षमिति ॥ १२ ॥
tasmiṃstvayi kiṃ vīryamityapīdaṃ
sarvamādadīya yadidaṃ pṛthivyāmiti
3.10
tasmai tṛṇaṃ nidadhāvetadādatsveti
tadupapreyāya sarvajavena tanna śaśākādātuṃ sa tata eva
nivavṛte naitadaśakaṃ vijñātuṃ yadetadyakṣamiti
3.11
athendramabruvanmaghavannetadvijānīhi kimetadyakṣamiti tatheti
tadabhyadravattasmāttirodadhe
3.12
sa tasminnevākāśe striyamājagāma bahuśobhamānāmumāṃ
haimavatīṃ tāṃhovāca kimetadyakṣamiti

3.9In you, then, what power is there? Even all this that is on the earth I could carry off. It laid a blade of grass before him: carry this off. He went at it with all his speed and could not lift it. He came back from it: I could not find out what this spirit is. Then they said to Indra: generous one, find out what this spirit is. So be it, he said. He ran up to it, and it vanished from him. In that same space he came upon a woman of great beauty, Uma of the snow mountain, and said to her: what is this spirit?

One blade of grass, three gods who is sent the claim the test the result Agni, fire I can burn everything burn this straw could not burn it reports only that he failed Vayu, wind I can carry all off move this straw could not move it comes back the same way Indra makes no claim no test is set it vanishes before him Uma is left, and explains Each god is one power, and the test is that power applied to the smallest thing there is. The three who came nearest are the three the text says excel: the victory was never theirs.
Figure 42.66 — The parable of chapters 3 and 4. Each god is defined by one power, and the test is that power applied to the smallest possible object.

Indra is treated differently and the difference is the point of the story. He is not given a straw, because the presence disappears before he reaches it, and what he finds in its place is a teacher. Nagler notes a joke in the sequence that is easy to miss: Agni reports back only that he failed to identify the being, not that he failed to burn a straw.

सा ब्रह्मेति होवाच ब्रह्मणो वा एतद्विजये महीयध्वमिति
ततो हैव विदाञ्चकार ब्रह्मेति ॥ १ ॥
तस्माद्वा एते देवा अतितरामिवान्यान्देवान्यदग्निर्वायुरिन्द्रस्ते
ह्येनन्नेदिष्ठं पस्पर्शुस्ते ह्येनत्प्रथमो विदाञ्चकार ब्रह्मेति ॥ २ ॥
तस्माद्वा इन्द्रोऽतितरामिवान्यान्देवान्स
ह्येनन्नेदिष्ठं पस्पर्श स ह्येनत्प्रथमो विदाञ्चकार ब्रह्मेति ॥ ३ ॥
तस्यैष आदेशो यदेतद्विद्युतो व्यद्युतदा
इतीन् न्यमीमिषदा इत्यधिदैवतम् ॥ ४ ॥
sā brahmeti hovāca brahmaṇo vā etadvijaye mahīyadhvamiti
tato haiva vidāñcakāra brahmeti
4.2
tasmādvā ete devā atitarāmivānyāndevānyadagnirvāyurindraste
hyenannediṣṭhaṃ pasparśuste hyenatprathamo vidāñcakāra brahmeti
4.3
tasmādvā indro'titarāmivānyāndevānsa
hyenannediṣṭhaṃ pasparśa sa hyenatprathamo vidāñcakāra brahmeti
4.4
tasyaiṣa ādeśo yadetadvidyuto vyadyutadā
itīn nyamīmiṣadā ityadhidaivatam

4.1She said: that is Brahman. It is in Brahman's victory that you have been growing great. From that alone he knew it was Brahman. Therefore these gods — Agni, Vayu and Indra — are as it were beyond the other gods, for they came nearest to it, and they were the first to know it was Brahman. Therefore Indra is as it were beyond the other gods, for he came nearest to it, and he was the first to know it was Brahman. This is its teaching, as regards the gods: it is that which flashed in the lightning, and which made the eye blink.

The three gods are ranked by proximity rather than by strength, and the ranking inverts the order of the story: the two who failed the test come out above the gods who were never sent, and the one who was not tested at all comes out first. What he got for going was not a victory but an explanation. Verse 4 gives the first of two examples, and it is chosen because a flash of lightning is over before it can be looked at.

Two examples, at two scales where the example why that one among the gods the flash of lightning over before it can be looked at in oneself the eye that blinks and the mind that seems to go and in both what is remembered by never the thing standing in front Nagler sets Augustine beside the second: in the striking of a fleeting look. The evidence offered is that the eye is made to blink, and nothing more.
Figure 42.67 — Verses 4.4 and 4.5. Two examples chosen for the same property: each is over before it can be looked at.
अथाध्यात्मं यद्देतद्गच्छतीव च मनोऽनेन
चैतदुपस्मरत्यभीक्ष्णं सङ्कल्पः ॥ ५ ॥
तद्ध तद्वनं नाम तद्वनमित्युपासितव्यं स य एतदेवं वेदाभि
हैनं सर्वाणि भूतानि संवाञ्छन्ति ॥ ६ ॥
उपनिषदं भो ब्रूहीत्युक्ता त उपनिषद्ब्राह्मीं वाव त
उपनिषदमब्रूमेति ॥ ७ ॥
तस्यै तपो दमः कर्मेति प्रतिष्ठा वेदाः सर्वाङ्गानि
सत्यमायतनम् ॥ ८ ॥
यो वा एतामेवं वेदापहत्य पाप्मानमनन्ते स्वर्गे
लोके ज्येये प्रतितिष्ठति प्रतितिष्ठति ॥ ९ ॥
athādhyātmaṃ yaddetadgacchatīva ca mano'nena
caitadupasmaratyabhīkṣṇaṃ saṅkalpaḥ
4.6
taddha tadvanaṃ nāma tadvanamityupāsitavyaṃ sa ya etadevaṃ vedābhi
hainaṃ sarvāṇi bhūtāni saṃvāñchanti
4.7
upaniṣadaṃ bho brūhītyuktā ta upaniṣadbrāhmīṃ vāva ta
upaniṣadamabrūmeti
4.8
tasyai tapo damaḥ karmeti pratiṣṭhā vedāḥ sarvāṅgāni
satyamāyatanam
4.9
yo vā etāmevaṃ vedāpahatya pāpmānamanante svarge
loke jyeye pratitiṣṭhati pratitiṣṭhati

4.5Now as regards the self: it is that towards which the mind seems to go, that by which one remembers again and again, and the will. Its name is Tadvanam, the beloved, and as the beloved it is to be honoured. All beings long for one who knows it so. Teach me the secret teaching, sir. The secret teaching has been told to you. We have told you the secret teaching of Brahman. Austerity, restraint and work are its foundation; the Vedas are all its limbs; truth is its dwelling place. Whoever knows it in this way, having struck off wrong, is founded in the endless world of light, the highest — founded indeed.

The parable and the doctrine are the same statement. Fire cannot burn, wind cannot carry and the gods cannot win except by a power that is not theirs, and the gods who come nearest to the presence are the ones who found this out. The fourth chapter makes the transfer explicit by giving two examples at two scales: lightning, which flashes and is gone, and the blink of an eye, and then the mind, which seems to go towards its object and by which one remembers. Nagler sets Augustine's in ictu trepidantis aspectus, in the striking of a fleeting look, beside the second. The name given in verse 6, Tadvanam, is one of two Upanishadic names for God with almost no literal sense, explained as the all-pervading beloved, and the text ends by naming its own subject: the word rendered as spiritual wisdom in verse 7 is upanishad. The practical consequence Nagler draws is Gandhi's. Since we are not the doer of any of our acts, including the act of knowing, the victory of good is guaranteed but not by us, and the way to be an instrument of it is what Gandhi called making oneself zero.

The name, and what stands under it Tadvanam, the beloved and as the beloved it is to be honoured the foundation austerity, restraint, work the limbs the Vedas, all of them the dwelling place truth One of two names for God in this collection with almost no literal sense of its own. The text ends by naming its own subject: the word for the secret teaching is upanishad.
Figure 42.68 — Verses 4.6 to 4.8. The name, and the three things the text puts under it.

Prashna: six questions

The Prashna belongs to the Atharva Veda and is the most orderly text in the collection. Six men come to the sage Pippalada, each with one question, and the six questions descend in order from the making of the world to the person in whom the world is made. The word prashna means question and is cognate with the German Frage.

सुकेशा च भारद्वाजः शैब्यश्च सत्यकामः सौर्यायणी च गार्ग्यः ।
कौसल्यश्चाश्वलायनो भार्गवो वैदर्भिः कबन्धी कात्यायनः ।
ते हैते ब्रह्मपराः परं ब्रह्मान्वेषमाणाः ।
ते ह समित्पाणयो भगवन्तं पिप्पलादमुपसन्नाः ।
तान् ह स ऋषिरुवाच भूय एव तपसा ब्रह्मचर्येण श्रद्धया संवत्सरं संवत्स्यथ ।
यथाकामं प्रश्नान् पृच्छत यदि विज्ञास्यामः सर्वं ह वो वक्ष्याम इति ।
अथ कबन्धी कात्यायन उपेत्य पप्रच्छ ।
भगवन् कुतो ह वा इमाः प्रजाः प्रजायन्त इति ।
sukeśā ca bhāradvājaḥ śaibyaśca satyakāmaḥ sauryāyaṇī ca gārgyaḥ
kausalyaścāśvalāyano bhārgavo vaidarbhiḥ kabandhī kātyāyanaḥ
te haite brahmaparāḥ paraṃ brahmānveṣamāṇāḥ
te ha samitpāṇayo bhagavantaṃ pippalādamupasannāḥ
1.2
tān ha sa ṛṣiruvāca bhūya eva tapasā brahmacaryeṇa śraddhayā saṃvatsaraṃ saṃvatsyatha
yathākāmaṃ praśnān pṛcchata yadi vijñāsyāmaḥ sarvaṃ ha vo vakṣyāma iti
1.3
atha kabandhī kātyāyana upetya papraccha
bhagavan kuto ha vā imāḥ prajāḥ prajāyanta iti

1.1Sukesha Bharadvaja, Shaibya Satyakama, Sauryayani Gargya, Kausalya Ashvalayana, Bhargava Vaidarbhi and Kabandhi Katyayana — these, devoted to Brahman, seeking the highest Brahman, came with fuel in their hands to the honoured Pippalada. The seer said to them: live with me another year, in discipline, in continence and in faith. Then ask questions as you please, and if we know we will tell you everything. Then Kabandhi Katyayana came up and asked: sir, from what are these creatures born?

Six men, six questions, one year first who asks what is asked Kabandhi from what are creatures born Bhargava which power holds the body together Kausalya where that power comes from and how it divides Gargya what sleeps and what stays awake in a man Satyakama what a life spent on OM wins Sukesha who the person with sixteen parts is
Figure 42.69 — The six questions and the order they come in. Each one takes as given what the answer before it established, and the last returns to the questioner.

The condition Pippalada sets is a year of living together before any question is asked, and the condition is not ceremonial: the questions are of a kind whose answers cannot be handed over. His reply to the first question names the pair the rest of the text works with, prana and rayi, which Nagler translates roughly as consciousness and matter, and identifies them with the sun and the moon.

तान् वरिष्ठः प्राण उवाच । मा मोहमापद्यथ ।
अहमेवैतत् पञ्चधात्मानं प्रविभज्यैतद्बाणमवष्टभ्य विधारयामीति ।
तेऽश्रद्दधाना बभूवुः ।
सोऽभिमानादूर्ध्वमुत्क्रामत इव ।
तस्मिन्नुत्क्रामत्यथेतरे सर्व एवोत्क्रामन्ते ।
तद्यथा मक्षिका मधुकरराजानमुत्क्रामन्तं सर्वा एवोत्क्रमन्ते ।
तस्मिंश्च प्रतिष्ठमाने सर्वा एव प्रतिष्ठन्ते ।
आत्मन एष प्राणो जायते ।
यथैषा पुरुषे छायैतस्मिन्नेतदाततम् ।
मनोकृतेनायात्यस्मिञ्शरीरे ।
अथैकयोर्ध्व उदानः पुण्येन पुण्यं लोकं नयति ।
पापेन पापमुभाभ्यामेव मनुष्यलोकम् ।
tān variṣṭhaḥ prāṇa uvāca | mā mohamāpadyatha
ahamevaitat pañcadhātmānaṃ pravibhajyaitadbāṇamavaṣṭabhya vidhārayāmīti
te'śraddadhānā babhūvuḥ
2.4
so'bhimānādūrdhvamutkrāmata iva
tasminnutkrāmatyathetare sarva evotkrāmante
tadyathā makṣikā madhukararājānamutkrāmantaṃ sarvā evotkramante
tasmiṃśca pratiṣṭhamāne sarvā eva pratiṣṭhante
3.3
ātmana eṣa prāṇo jāyate
yathaiṣā puruṣe chāyaitasminnetadātatam
manokṛtenāyātyasmiñśarīre
3.7
athaikayordhva udānaḥ puṇyena puṇyaṃ lokaṃ nayati
pāpena pāpamubhābhyāmeva manuṣyalokam

2.3Prana, the greatest of them, said to them: do not deceive yourselves. It is I who hold this body together, dividing myself in five and propping up this reed. Out of pride he seemed to go upward. When he went up, all the others went up; when he settled, all settled. As when the bees go up after the queen going up, and all settle when she settles. This prana is born of the Self. As a shadow is cast by a person, so this is stretched out on that. It comes into this body by the act of the mind. The upward one, udana, leads by merit to the world of merit, by wrong to the world of wrong, and by both to the world of men.

The second question asks which of the powers supporting the body is the greatest, and the answer is given by an experiment rather than an argument. The powers quarrel; prana starts to leave; everything else has to leave with it; they believe him. The bees are the comparison, and the point of the comparison is that the queen does not command and is not obeyed — the swarm simply cannot stay without her. The shadow in the third answer is the sharpest image in the text, and Nagler notes that it puts the Self and its energy in the right order: the shadow is cast, and the caster does not move when the shadow does.

A demonstration where an argument would not settle it the powers quarrel which of us is greatest prana begins to rise and go all the rest rise they cannot stay and they believe him he settles; all settle As the bees go up after the queen going up, and settle when she settles. She does not command and is not obeyed: the swarm simply cannot stay without her.
Figure 42.70 — Verses 2.3 and 2.4. The question is settled by a demonstration, and the bees supply the reason it works.
यथा गार्ग्य मरीचयोऽर्कस्यास्तं गच्छतः सर्वा एतस्मिंस्तेजोमण्डल एकीभवन्ति ।
ताः पुनः पुनरुदयतः प्रचरन्ति ।
एवं ह वै तत् सर्वं परे देवे मनस्येकीभवति ।
तेन तर्ह्येष पुरुषो न शृणोति न पश्यति स्वपितीत्याचक्षते ।
एतद्वै सत्यकाम परं चापरं च ब्रह्म यदोङ्कारः ।
तस्माद्विद्वानेतेनैवायतनेनैकतरमन्वेति ।
अथ हैनं सुकेशा भारद्वाजः पप्रच्छ ।
भगवन् हिरण्यनाभः कौसल्यो राजपुत्रो मामुपेत्यैतं प्रश्नमपृच्छत ।
षोडशकलं भारद्वाज पुरुषं वेत्थ ।
तमहं कुमारमब्रुवं नाहमिमं वेद ।
तस्मै स होवाच इहैवान्तःशरीरे सोम्य स पुरुषः ।
यस्मिन्नेताः षोडशकलाः प्रभवन्तीति ।
yathā gārgya marīcayo'rkasyāstaṃ gacchataḥ sarvā etasmiṃstejomaṇḍala ekībhavanti
tāḥ punaḥ punarudayataḥ pracaranti
evaṃ ha vai tat sarvaṃ pare deve manasyekībhavati
tena tarhyeṣa puruṣo na śṛṇoti na paśyati svapitītyācakṣate
5.2
etadvai satyakāma paraṃ cāparaṃ ca brahma yadoṅkāraḥ
tasmādvidvānetenaivāyatanenaikataramanveti
6.1
atha hainaṃ sukeśā bhāradvājaḥ papraccha
bhagavan hiraṇyanābhaḥ kausalyo rājaputro māmupetyaitaṃ praśnamapṛcchata
ṣoḍaśakalaṃ bhāradvāja puruṣaṃ vettha
tamahaṃ kumāramabruvaṃ nāhamimaṃ veda
6.2
tasmai sa hovāca ihaivāntaḥśarīre somya sa puruṣaḥ
yasminnetāḥ ṣoḍaśakalāḥ prabhavantīti

4.2As the rays of the setting sun all become one in that disc of light, and spread out again as it rises again — so all this becomes one in the highest god, the mind. Then this person does not hear, does not see. They say: he sleeps. This OM, Satyakama, is both the higher and the lower Brahman. Therefore by this support alone the knower reaches one or the other. Then Sukesha Bharadvaja asked him: sir, Hiranyanabha the prince of Kosala came to me and asked this question — do you know the person with sixteen parts? I said to the boy: I do not know him. He said to him: here, within the body, dear one, is that person in whom these sixteen parts arise.

The fourth question is about sleep and the answer is the setting sun: the senses are not extinguished but withdrawn into one place, and the image supplies its own account of waking. The fifth question asks what a man gains by meditating on OM until death, and the answer refuses to make it one thing, since the syllable reaches both the lower Brahman and the higher and the meditator gets what he aimed at. The sixth question is asked by a man who was asked it himself and admitted he could not answer, which is the only such admission in the collection.

स यथेमा नद्यः स्यन्दमानाः समुद्रायणाः समुद्रं प्राप्यास्तं गच्छन्ति ।
भिद्येते तासां नामरूपे समुद्र इत्येवं प्रोच्यते ।
एवमेवास्य परिद्रष्टुरिमाः षोडशकलाः पुरुषायणाः पुरुषं प्राप्यास्तं गच्छन्ति ।
स एषोऽकलोऽमृतो भवति ।
अरा इव रथनाभौ कला यस्मिन् प्रतिष्ठिताः ।
तं वेद्यं पुरुषं वेद यथा मा वो मृत्युः परिव्यथा इति ।
sa yathemā nadyaḥ syandamānāḥ samudrāyaṇāḥ samudraṃ prāpyāstaṃ gacchanti
bhidyete tāsāṃ nāmarūpe samudra ityevaṃ procyate
evamevāsya paridraṣṭurimāḥ ṣoḍaśakalāḥ puruṣāyaṇāḥ puruṣaṃ prāpyāstaṃ gacchanti
sa eṣo'kalo'mṛto bhavati
6.6
arā iva rathanābhau kalā yasmin pratiṣṭhitāḥ
taṃ vedyaṃ puruṣaṃ veda yathā mā vo mṛtyuḥ parivyathā iti

6.5As these flowing rivers, making for the sea, on reaching the sea come to their setting, and their name and shape are broken, and it is called simply the sea — so of this onlooker these sixteen parts, making for the person, on reaching the person come to their setting. He becomes partless and deathless. As spokes are fixed in the hub of a wheel, so the parts are fixed in him. Know that person who is to be known, so that death may not distress you.

The sixteen parts are prana, faith, the five elements, the senses, mind, food, strength, austerity, mantra, work, the worlds and the name; the list is a catalogue of everything a person is made of, including the intangible items. What the last two verses do is dissolve the list. The rivers are the Mundaka's rivers and the wheel is the Brihadaranyaka's wheel, and this is one of the places where the collection can be seen quoting itself.

Sixteen parts, and what they are fixed in the sixteen parts prana, faith, the five elements the senses, mind, food, strength austerity, mantra, work the worlds, and the name fixed in him as spokes in a hub partless, and deathless reaching the person, they come to their setting, as rivers reaching the sea are called simply the sea The list catalogues everything a person is made of, the intangible items included. The rivers are the Mundaka's and the wheel the Brihadaranyaka's: the text quotes itself.
Figure 42.71 — Verses 6.2 to 6.6. The catalogue, and the two images the text uses to dissolve it.

Taittiriya: the ascent to joy

The Taittiriya belongs to the Black Yajur Veda and is named after a bird, the partridge, which is probably onomatopoeia. It is almost all prose, and Shankara called it the essence of its tradition. It is divided into three vallis with thirty-one sections between them, counted straight through here. The first is about instruction, the second about what a person is made of, the third about a boy who keeps coming back to ask again.

वेदमनूच्याचार्योऽन्तेवासिनमनुशास्ति ।
सत्यं वद । धर्मं चर । स्वाध्यायान्मा प्रमदः ।
मातृदेवो भव । पितृदेवो भव । आचार्यदेवो भव । अतिथिदेवो भव ।
श्रद्धया देयम् । अश्रद्धयाऽदेयम् । श्रिया देयम् । ह्रिया देयम् । भिया देयम् ।
vedamanūcyācāryo'ntevāsinamanuśāsti
satyaṃ vada | dharmaṃ cara | svādhyāyānmā pramadaḥ
mātṛdevo bhava | pitṛdevo bhava | ācāryadevo bhava | atithidevo bhava
śraddhayā deyam | aśraddhayā'deyam | śriyā deyam | hriyā deyam | bhiyā deyam

11Having taught the Veda, the teacher instructs the pupil. Speak the truth. Do what is right. Do not be careless about your own study. Be one to whom mother is a god, father is a god, teacher is a god, guest is a god. Give with faith; do not give without faith. Give in proportion. Give with modesty. Give with awe.

This is the oldest convocation address on record and it is still read at Indian universities. It is a list of imperatives with no reasons attached, and the interesting part is the middle. The three qualifications on giving — shriya, hriya, bhiya — form a jingle that makes them easy to remember and hard to translate; they are roughly with modesty, with sympathy and with awe. The instruction that follows in the original tells the student what to do when he does not know what is right, and the answer is to find people who are careful, unharsh and not driven, and do what they do.

What the teacher says when the teaching is over what to do speak the truth do what is right do not neglect your study who is a god to you mother, father teacher, guest how to give with faith, never without in proportion, with modesty and with awe The oldest convocation address on record, and still read at Indian universities. Shriya, hriya, bhiya: a jingle built to be remembered, and hard to carry into English.
Figure 42.72 — Section 11. Three commands, four people, and five qualifications on giving.
ब्रह्मविदाप्नोति परम् । तदेषाभ्युक्ता ।
सत्यं ज्ञानमनन्तं ब्रह्म । यो वेद निहितं गुहायां परमे व्योमन् ।
तस्माद्वा एतस्मादात्मन आकाशः सम्भूतः । आकाशाद्वायुः । वायोरग्निः ।
स वा एष पुरुषोऽन्नरसमयः ।
तस्माद्वा एतस्मादन्नरसमयात् । अन्योऽन्तर आत्मा प्राणमयः ।
तस्य प्राण एव शिरः । व्यानो दक्षिणः पक्षः । अपान उत्तरः पक्षः ।
आकाश आत्मा । पृथिवी पुच्छं प्रतिष्ठा ।
तस्माद्वा एतस्मात् प्राणमयात् । अन्योऽन्तर आत्मा मनोमयः ।
तस्य यजुरेव शिरः । ऋग्दक्षिणः पक्षः । सामोत्तरः पक्षः ।
यतो वाचो निवर्तन्ते । अप्राप्य मनसा सह ।
तस्माद्वा एतस्मान्मनोमयात् । अन्योऽन्तर आत्मा विज्ञानमयः ।
तस्य श्रद्धैव शिरः । ऋतं दक्षिणः पक्षः । सत्यमुत्तरः पक्षः ।
विज्ञानं यज्ञं तनुते । कर्माणि तनुतेऽपि च ।
तस्माद्वा एतस्माद्विज्ञानमयात् । अन्योऽन्तर आत्मानन्दमयः ।
तस्य प्रियमेव शिरः । मोदो दक्षिणः पक्षः । प्रमोद उत्तरः पक्षः ।
आनन्द आत्मा । ब्रह्म पुच्छं प्रतिष्ठा ।
brahmavidāpnoti param | tadeṣābhyuktā
satyaṃ jñānamanantaṃ brahma | yo veda nihitaṃ guhāyāṃ parame vyoman
tasmādvā etasmādātmana ākāśaḥ sambhūtaḥ | ākāśādvāyuḥ | vāyoragniḥ
sa vā eṣa puruṣo'nnarasamayaḥ
14
tasmādvā etasmādannarasamayāt | anyo'ntara ātmā prāṇamayaḥ
tasya prāṇa eva śiraḥ | vyāno dakṣiṇaḥ pakṣaḥ | apāna uttaraḥ pakṣaḥ
ākāśa ātmā | pṛthivī pucchaṃ pratiṣṭhā
15
tasmādvā etasmāt prāṇamayāt | anyo'ntara ātmā manomayaḥ
tasya yajureva śiraḥ | ṛgdakṣiṇaḥ pakṣaḥ | sāmottaraḥ pakṣaḥ
16
yato vāco nivartante | aprāpya manasā saha
tasmādvā etasmānmanomayāt | anyo'ntara ātmā vijñānamayaḥ
tasya śraddhaiva śiraḥ | ṛtaṃ dakṣiṇaḥ pakṣaḥ | satyamuttaraḥ pakṣaḥ
17
vijñānaṃ yajñaṃ tanute | karmāṇi tanute'pi ca
tasmādvā etasmādvijñānamayāt | anyo'ntara ātmānandamayaḥ
tasya priyameva śiraḥ | modo dakṣiṇaḥ pakṣaḥ | pramoda uttaraḥ pakṣaḥ
ānanda ātmā | brahma pucchaṃ pratiṣṭhā

13The knower of Brahman reaches the highest. Brahman is the real, knowledge, the endless. He who knows it as set in the cave, in the highest space — from this Self space came to be, from space air, from air fire. This person is made of the essence of food. From this one made of the essence of food there is another self within, made of breath. Breath is its head; the out-breath is its right wing, the down-breath its left; space is its trunk, earth its foundation. From this one made of breath there is another self within, made of mind. The Yajur is its head; the Rig is its right wing, the Sama its left. From which words turn back, not having reached it, together with the mind. From this one made of mind there is another self within, made of understanding. Faith is its head; order is its right wing, truth its left. Understanding stretches out the sacrifice, and stretches out works as well. From this one made of understanding there is another self within, made of joy. Delight is its head; gladness is its right wing, rejoicing its left; joy is its trunk, Brahman its foundation.

Five selves, each in the shape of a bird made of head right wing left wing rests on food the head the right side the left side the earth breath breath out-breath down-breath the earth mind the Yajur the Rig the Sama the Atharva understanding faith order truth greatness joy delight gladness rejoicing Brahman Each is said to be filled by the one within it. Only the last rests on something not in the list.
Figure 42.73 — The five selves of the second valli. Each is described in the same five parts, each is said to be filled by the one inside it, and the innermost has Brahman where the others have a floor.

Five selves are described in the same five terms and each is said to be purna, filled, by the one inside it. The parts are a bird's: head, right wing, left wing, trunk, and a tail that is the pratishtha, the thing it rests on. Easwaran renders the wings as arms and the bird disappears in the English, which is why the figure here draws what the Sanskrit says. The later tradition gave the five their names — annamaya, pranamaya, manomaya, vijnanamaya, anandamaya — and called them koshas, sheaths; the text itself never uses the word. What the structure claims is that the body is not the outermost layer of a person but the outermost of five, and that each layer is a self to whoever is standing in it.

भीषास्माद्वातः पवते । भीषोदेति सूर्यः ।
युवा स्यात्साधुयुवाध्यायकः । आशिष्ठो दृढिष्ठो बलिष्ठः ।
तस्येयं पृथिवी सर्वा वित्तस्य पूर्णा स्यात् । स एको मानुष आनन्दः ।
ते ये शतं मानुषा आनन्दाः । स एको मनुष्यगन्धर्वाणामानन्दः ।
श्रोत्रियस्य चाकामहतस्य ।
यतो वाचो निवर्तन्ते । अप्राप्य मनसा सह ।
आनन्दं ब्रह्मणो विद्वान् । न बिभेति कुतश्चनेति ।
bhīṣāsmādvātaḥ pavate | bhīṣodeti sūryaḥ
yuvā syātsādhuyuvādhyāyakaḥ | āśiṣṭho dṛḍhiṣṭho baliṣṭhaḥ
tasyeyaṃ pṛthivī sarvā vittasya pūrṇā syāt | sa eko mānuṣa ānandaḥ
te ye śataṃ mānuṣā ānandāḥ | sa eko manuṣyagandharvāṇāmānandaḥ
śrotriyasya cākāmahatasya
21
yato vāco nivartante | aprāpya manasā saha
ānandaṃ brahmaṇo vidvān | na bibheti kutaścaneti

20Through fear of this the wind blows; through fear of it the sun rises. Suppose a young man, a good young man, well read, quick, firm and strong, and suppose the whole earth full of wealth were his: that is one measure of human joy. A hundred of those human joys are one joy of the human spirits — and of one who has heard and is free from craving. From which words turn back, not having reached it, together with the mind. One who knows the joy of Brahman fears nothing at all.

Joy multiplied by a hundred, eight times joy rung a man one who has heard, free of craving the same clause repeated at every rung so the ladder is not climbed Schematic. The nine steps are a man, the human spirits, the ancestors, two orders of gods, then the gods, Indra, Brihaspati and Prajapati. The vertical scale is compressed.
Figure 42.74 — The arithmetic of section twenty. Eight multiplications by a hundred, and at every rung the same clause about a man who is not on the ladder at all.

The calculation has eight steps and each multiplies by a hundred: human joy, then the joy of the human spirits, the ancestors, the gods born so, the gods by work, the gods, Indra, Brihaspati, Virat and Prajapati. What makes it an argument rather than a list is the clause repeated at every rung, that the same joy belongs to a man who has heard the teaching and is free from craving. The ladder is built in order to be stepped off, and the last section takes back the terms in which it was built, since what words turn back from cannot be at the top of a series.

भृगुर्वै वारुणिः । वरुणं पितरमुपससार । अधीहि भगवो ब्रह्मेति ।
अन्नं प्राणं चक्षुः श्रोत्रं मनो वाचमिति तं होवाच ।
यतो वा इमानि भूतानि जायन्ते । येन जातानि जीवन्ति ।
यत्प्रयन्त्यभिसंविशन्ति । तद्विजिज्ञासस्व । तद्ब्रह्मेति ।
अन्नं ब्रह्मेति व्यजानात् ।
अन्नाद्ध्येव खल्विमानि भूतानि जायन्ते । अन्नेन जातानि जीवन्ति ।
तद्विज्ञाय पुनरेव वरुणं पितरमुपससार । अधीहि भगवो ब्रह्मेति ।
तं होवाच तपसा ब्रह्म विजिज्ञासस्व । तपो ब्रह्मेति ।
आनन्दो ब्रह्मेति व्यजानात् ।
आनन्दाद्ध्येव खल्विमानि भूतानि जायन्ते । आनन्देन जातानि जीवन्ति ।
सैषा भार्गवी वारुणी विद्या । परमे व्योमन् प्रतिष्ठिता ।
bhṛgurvai vāruṇiḥ | varuṇaṃ pitaramupasasāra | adhīhi bhagavo brahmeti
annaṃ prāṇaṃ cakṣuḥ śrotraṃ mano vācamiti taṃ hovāca
yato vā imāni bhūtāni jāyante | yena jātāni jīvanti
yatprayantyabhisaṃviśanti | tadvijijñāsasva | tadbrahmeti
23
annaṃ brahmeti vyajānāt
annāddhyeva khalvimāni bhūtāni jāyante | annena jātāni jīvanti
tadvijñāya punareva varuṇaṃ pitaramupasasāra | adhīhi bhagavo brahmeti
taṃ hovāca tapasā brahma vijijñāsasva | tapo brahmeti
27
ānando brahmeti vyajānāt
ānandāddhyeva khalvimāni bhūtāni jāyante | ānandena jātāni jīvanti
saiṣā bhārgavī vāruṇī vidyā | parame vyoman pratiṣṭhitā

22Bhrigu, the son of Varuna, came to his father Varuna and said: sir, teach me Brahman. He told him this: food, breath, eye, ear, mind, speech. And he said to him: that from which these beings are born, by which when born they live, into which they go and enter — seek to know that. That is Brahman. He knew that food is Brahman. For from food these beings are born, by food when born they live. Having known that, he came again to his father Varuna and said: sir, teach me Brahman. He said to him: seek to know Brahman by tapas. Tapas is Brahman. He knew that joy is Brahman. For from joy these beings are born, by joy when born they live. This is the knowledge of Bhrigu and Varuna, founded in the highest space.

Varuna never answers the question. He gives a test — find what things are born from, live by and return to — and then sends the boy away five times with the same one-line instruction. What the boy brings back each time is his own, and the five answers he brings are the five selves of the second valli in order: food, breath, mind, understanding, joy. The pedagogy is the point. The father possesses the answer throughout and refuses to say it, because the sequence is not information.

अन्नं बहु कुर्वीत । तद्व्रतम् ।
न कञ्चन वसतौ प्रत्याचक्षीत । तद्व्रतम् ।
तस्माद्यया कया च विधया बह्वन्नं प्राप्नुयात् ।
अराध्यस्मा अन्नमित्याचक्षते ।
annaṃ bahu kurvīta | tadvratam
31
na kañcana vasatau pratyācakṣīta | tadvratam
tasmādyayā kayā ca vidhayā bahvannaṃ prāpnuyāt
arādhyasmā annamityācakṣate

30Make food plentiful. That is the rule. Do not turn anyone away from your house. That is the rule. Therefore by whatever means, let a man get plenty of food. They say of such a man: food is ready for him.

Four instructions about food close the text and they are all practical. Do not despise food; do not waste it; increase it, because the earth can yield more; and refuse it to nobody who comes. Nagler treats the third as the answer to the charge that this literature is world-denying, and the sentence is hard to read any other way: it is an instruction to raise the yield.

Aitareya: the unity of life

The Aitareya belongs to the Rig Veda and sits inside the Aitareya Aranyaka. It is the shortest of the principal texts after the Mandukya; its three chapters hold five sections, counted straight through here, and it tells the story of creation as a sequence of openings.

आत्मा वा इदमेक एवाग्र आसीत् । नान्यत्किञ्चन मिषत् ।
स ईक्षत लोकान्नु सृजा इति ।
स इमांल्लोकानसृजत । अम्भो मरीचीर्मरमापः ।
अदोऽम्भः परेण दिवं द्यौः प्रतिष्ठान्तरिक्षं मरीचयः ।
पृथिवी मरो या अधस्तात्ता आपः ।
स ईक्षतेमे नु लोका लोकपालान्नु सृजा इति ।
सोऽद्भ्य एव पुरुषं समुद्धृत्यामूर्छयत् ।
तमभ्यतपत्तस्याभितप्तस्य मुखं निरभिद्यत यथाण्डम् ।
मुखाद्वाग्वाचोऽग्निर्नासिके निरभिद्येतां नासिकाभ्यां प्राणः ।
अक्षिणी निरभिद्येतामक्षीभ्यां चक्षुश्चक्षुष आदित्यः ।
हृदयं निरभिद्यत हृदयान्मनो मनसश्चन्द्रमाः ।
ātmā vā idameka evāgra āsīt | nānyatkiñcana miṣat
sa īkṣata lokānnu sṛjā iti
1.2
sa imāṃllokānasṛjata | ambho marīcīrmaramāpaḥ
ado'mbhaḥ pareṇa divaṃ dyauḥ pratiṣṭhāntarikṣaṃ marīcayaḥ
pṛthivī maro yā adhastāttā āpaḥ
1.3
sa īkṣateme nu lokā lokapālānnu sṛjā iti
so'dbhya eva puruṣaṃ samuddhṛtyāmūrchayat
1.4
tamabhyatapattasyābhitaptasya mukhaṃ nirabhidyata yathāṇḍam
mukhādvāgvāco'gnirnāsike nirabhidyetāṃ nāsikābhyāṃ prāṇaḥ
akṣiṇī nirabhidyetāmakṣībhyāṃ cakṣuścakṣuṣa ādityaḥ
hṛdayaṃ nirabhidyata hṛdayānmano manasaścandramāḥ

1.1In the beginning the Self alone was this, and nothing else whatever blinked. He thought: let me send forth worlds. He sent forth these worlds: the flood, the light-rays, the mortal, the waters. That flood is beyond the sky; the sky is its floor; the middle air is the light-rays; the earth is the mortal; what is below is the waters. He thought: here now are the worlds. Let me send forth guardians of the worlds. He drew a person out of the waters and gave him a shape. He brooded on him, and from him so brooded on the mouth split open as an egg does; from the mouth speech, from speech fire. The nostrils split open; from the nostrils breath, from breath the wind. The eyes split open; from the eyes sight, from sight the sun. The heart split open; from the heart mind, from mind the moon.

The word for what the Self does to the person, abhyatapat, is the verb of tapas and means brooded over or heated. Each opening produces two things at once, a faculty and the piece of the world that faculty deals with, so that the eye and the sun come into being in the same act. The order is anatomical from the top down, and the last two openings, the navel and the sex organ, produce the downward breath with death, and the seed with birth. The deities then enter the body by the doors they came out of; only the Self enters by a door that was never a sense, the opening at the crown, and the text says it found the three states of consciousness there.

Each opening makes a faculty and a piece of the world what splits open the faculty and at the same time the mouth speech fire the nostrils breath the wind the eyes sight the sun the heart the mind the moon the crown no faculty at all the door the Self comes in by The eye and the sun are said to come into being in the same act. The verb abhyatapat is the verb of tapas: he brooded, and it split open as an egg does.
Figure 42.75 — Verse 1.4. Each opening yields a faculty and the piece of the world that faculty deals with; one opening yields neither.
कोऽयमात्मेति वयमुपास्महे कतरः स आत्मा ।
येन वा पश्यति येन वा शृणोति येन वा गन्धानाजिघ्रति ।
येन वा वाचं व्याकरोति येन वा स्वादु चास्वादु च विजानाति ।
एष ब्रह्मैष इन्द्र एष प्रजापतिरेते सर्वे देवाः ।
इमानि च पञ्चमहाभूतानि पृथिवी वायुराकाश आपो ज्योतींषि ।
अण्डजानि च जारुजानि च स्वेदजानि चोद्भिज्जानि च ।
अश्वा गावः पुरुषा हस्तिनो यत्किञ्चेदं प्राणि जङ्गमं च पतत्रि च ।
सर्वं तत्प्रज्ञानेत्रं प्रज्ञाने प्रतिष्ठितं प्रज्ञानेत्रो लोकः प्रज्ञा प्रतिष्ठा प्रज्ञानं ब्रह्म ।
ko'yamātmeti vayamupāsmahe kataraḥ sa ātmā
yena vā paśyati yena vā śṛṇoti yena vā gandhānājighrati
yena vā vācaṃ vyākaroti yena vā svādu cāsvādu ca vijānāti
5.3
eṣa brahmaiṣa indra eṣa prajāpatirete sarve devāḥ
imāni ca pañcamahābhūtāni pṛthivī vāyurākāśa āpo jyotīṃṣi
aṇḍajāni ca jārujāni ca svedajāni codbhijjāni ca
aśvā gāvaḥ puruṣā hastino yatkiñcedaṃ prāṇi jaṅgamaṃ ca patatri ca
sarvaṃ tatprajñānetraṃ prajñāne pratiṣṭhitaṃ prajñānetro lokaḥ prajñā pratiṣṭhā prajñānaṃ brahma

5.1Who is this Self we worship? Which is the Self? Is it that by which one sees, or by which one hears, or by which one smells odours, or by which one speaks, or by which one knows the sweet and the unsweet? This is Brahman, this is Indra, this is Prajapati, these are all the gods; and these five great elements, earth, air, space, water, light; and the creatures born of eggs, born of wombs, born of sweat, born of shoots; horses, cattle, people, elephants; whatever breathes, and moves, and flies, and stands still. All that has consciousness for its eye, is founded on consciousness. Consciousness is Brahman.

The final sentence, prajnanam brahma, is one of the four great formulae. What gives it its force is the list it comes at the end of, which is deliberately mixed: gods and elements and livestock and things that do not move, sorted only by how they are born. The compound in the last line, prajnanetram, means having consciousness as its eye, or moved by consciousness, and both readings are defended. Nagler takes the formula as the explanation of two things at once, the unity of life and its sanctity, and notes that the text makes the same claim about a human being that the Cloud of Unknowing makes: nothing in nature stands above.

A list sorted only by how a thing is born Brahman, Indra, Prajapati, all the gods earth, air, space, water, light born of eggs, of wombs, of sweat, of shoots horses, cattle, people, elephants whatever breathes, moves, flies, stands still all of it has consciousness for its eye The compound prajnanetram reads as having consciousness for an eye, or moved by it. Nagler takes the formula to explain two things at once: the unity of life and its sanctity.
Figure 42.76 — Verse 5.3. The list is deliberately mixed, and the sentence at the end is what it is all sorted by.

Four more, and what minor means

Easwaran closes with four short texts that do not belong to Shankara's list, and Nagler is careful about what that means: a minor Upanishad is one Shankara did not comment on or cite at length, not one that is minor in wisdom or in force. Some of them, he says, carry insights of the same size as the ones Shankara singled out, and often in the same style.

TextWhat it isWhere it belongs
TejobinduThe beyondness of reality, and the instruction to go past the scriptures themselvesNo Vedic affiliation
AtmaThree selves — the body, the mind, and what is beyond bothNo Vedic affiliation
AmritabinduTwenty-two verses on the mind as the seat of the whole struggleNo Vedic affiliation
ParamahamsaThat the mendicant's staff, thread and tuft are symbols of things to be had withinWhite Yajur Veda

Four or five Upanishads have names ending in bindu, a drop, which marks them as distillations. The Amritabindu's first line is the one most often lifted out of the group — the mind is of two kinds, pure and impure, and it is the mind that frees or enslaves — and the text then reasons from the jar of air that does not change when the jar is moved and does not know when the jar is broken. The Paramahamsa takes its name from the great swan, a bird that can fly alone, and it says of its subject that he has no staff, no tuft and no sacred thread, which in the society the text was written in meant giving up the right to perform the rites at all. Nagler sets it beside the last chapter of the Dhammapada and, later, the poems of Kabir.

Since about 700 BC

Nobody knows when these texts were composed or by whom, and the sages did not care to leave names. The oldest layer is prose and the Brihadaranyaka and Chandogya belong to it; the Katha, the Isha and the Kena are verse and later; the Shvetashvatara is later still, and some texts bearing the name are medieval. Easwaran's own dating is loose to the point of being a gesture — he writes of five thousand years and of the dawn of time — and Nagler is more careful, noting that the Isha comes down as part of a Samhita, which would normally argue for high antiquity, except that the White Yajur Veda is itself relatively recent. The usual scholarly range for the principal texts runs from about the eighth or seventh century BC to a few centuries after, and no argument in the collection depends on the date.

The commentarial history is better documented than the compositional one. Gaudapada's verses on the Mandukya came first and argued the case on grounds independent of scripture. Shankara, early in the eighth century, wrote on ten of the Upanishads and in doing so gave them a secondary canonization; the list runs Isha, Kena, Katha, Prashna, Mundaka, Mandukya, Taittiriya, Aitareya, Chandogya, Brihadaranyaka, and a text's being called minor means only that it is not on that list. Nagler is careful to say that the list has been reshaped by various authorities and is not fixed. What Shankara built on the texts was a system, and when India's philosophers built systems on this foundation they found they had produced positions that disagreed with one another. Easwaran's response to that is Ramakrishna's: the systems are views from different vantage points, neither higher nor lower, and in practice they come to the same thing.

The Western history begins with Schopenhauer, who read the collection in a Latin translation of a Persian one and said the Upanishads had been the consolation of his life and would be the consolation of his death. He made two predictions. The first was that the barrier between East and West would fall and that his century's one advantage over the seventeenth would be its possession of these documents. The second, in the sentence usually cut from the quotation, was that they were "destined sooner or later to become the faith of the people". Nagler's verdict is that the old pessimist was wrong about the timing: two centuries came and went and brought neither the revolution nor much of the open-mindedness Schopenhauer himself had. Max Müller translated them, Yeats was drawn by the poetry, Huxley filed them under the perennial philosophy, and Easwaran arrived at them by accident in a college library and spent forty years with them.

Read straight through, the collection turns out to be less various than its reputation. The same verses recur in different texts — the two birds in the Mundaka and the Shvetashvatara, the sun that does not shine there in the Katha, the Mundaka and the Shvetashvatara, the line about the Self choosing whom it will in the Katha and the Mundaka — and the same half-dozen images do most of the work everywhere: the rivers reaching the sea, the salt in water, the spider and its thread, the wheel and its spokes, the two selves in one cave. What differs between the texts is temperament rather than doctrine. The Brihadaranyaka argues in public and enjoys it; the Chandogya teaches a boy at home; the Prashna answers questions in order; the Shvetashvatara prays.

What has held up is the method rather than the cosmology. The texts do not ask for belief; they describe a procedure and claim it is repeatable, and they say so in a tone that is neither indignant nor defensive — ignorance is its own punishment and wisdom its own reward. The psychology of attention they rest on has proved the most portable part: the claim that concentration can be trained, that trained concentration changes what is available to observation, and that the mind is better treated as an instrument than as the observer. What has been contested is everything that follows from the second step. That the states of consciousness are also strata; that there is a fourth which is not a state; that the observer who survives the withdrawal of body and mind is the same in everyone — these are claims about what is found, not about what is inferred, and the collection offers no way to check them from outside. Easwaran does not pretend otherwise. His argument for the texts is the one they make for themselves, which is that they are instructions, and that the only test of an instruction is to carry it out.

Claims drawn from this chapter · 9

The Isha Upanishad tells you to enjoy what you do not own

The Isha Upanishad's first two verses deny that anything is yours and in the same breath tell you to enjoy it. They then prescribe a hundred years of work, on the ground that work done this way leaves nothing clinging.

BecauseIsha 1–2 puts the two together — Gandhi reduced the first verse to two words, renounce and enjoy — and names a hundred years of work as the condition; it is a prescription, with the claim about residue unfalsifiable as stated.
LimitsNo measurement, and no account of what a residue would look like if it were there. Job crafting reaches a comparable result from the other direction by changing the job's boundaries and meaning rather than the person's claim on the result.
PracticeWitness practice in review — do the whole of the work and drop the claim on what it produces; the two are separable and only the second is optional.
After AIAn assistant makes the output cheap, which makes ownership of the output a stranger thing to insist on. The sentence reads now as an instruction about what to hold on to when the product stops being a good measure of the work.

The Katha Upanishad asks the reader to turn the eye back

The Katha Upanishad says the sense organs open outward, so attention goes outward by itself. The one thing the collection asks a reader to do is turn the eye back on itself.

BecauseKatha 4.1 gives *avritta-chakshus*, the eye turned back, as anatomy used as an argument; it is an instruction with no way to check the result from outside.
LimitsAn anatomical observation made to carry a metaphysical conclusion. The direction of the sense organs explains a default of attention and not the existence of anything found by reversing it.
PracticeWitness practice in review — during a review, take one deliberate look at who is reviewing rather than only at what is under review.
After AIThe default runs harder now, because the outward opening answers back. An assistant supplies an endless outside to attend to, and the turning back has to be scheduled.

The Katha Upanishad judges a person by what they prefer, not do

The Katha Upanishad says that at every moment two things present themselves: what is good for you and what you are fond of. What tells one person from another is which of the two they prefer, not what they end up doing.

BecauseKatha 2.1–2.2 sets *shreya* against *preya* as a standing pair rather than an occasional dilemma, and Nagler's gloss has the choice faced waking and even sleeping; it is a claim about the structure of motivation, offered without evidence.
LimitsSelf-determination theory reads the same data the other way: what a person is drawn to is evidence about which needs are being met, not a verdict on the person. The text offers no way to tell an act done from *shreya* from the same act done from *preya*.
PracticeWitness practice in review — when you notice you have reached for the easier route, record the preference rather than the action; the action is often the same either way.
After AIDelegation makes the two indistinguishable from outside. Using the assistant because it is the right tool and using it because it is the easy one produce identical commits, which leaves the preference as the only thing to watch.

The Katha Upanishad ranks the mind above the senses and their objects

The world you meet is shaped by the equipment you meet it with. The Katha Upanishad puts sense objects above the senses and the mind above both, as a ladder to be climbed.

BecauseKatha 3.10 and the ladder of 3.13 state the order as a hierarchy to be climbed, in the order Nagler insists the text actually gives; the ranking is asserted, not argued.
LimitsA ladder with a top, offered as a route rather than a mechanism. Kahneman's version of the same observation is a process to be corrected from outside by a rule; the Katha's is a climb to be made from inside, and nothing in the text says how to tell progress from imagination.
PracticeProjection log — when something in a system looks obvious, record what equipment made it look that way before acting on the appearance.
After AIThe equipment now includes a model whose processing nobody can inspect. The ladder gains a rung the text does not have: what is encountered has been shaped by a system that is neither the senses nor the mind.

The Kena Upanishad says what you can worship is not the reality

The Kena Upanishad says that once you can set something up in front of you and worship it, that thing is not the reality being pointed at. It also says no power a faculty uses, such as fire's burning, belongs to the faculty itself.

Becausethe second half of each Kena refrain is "not this that people worship here", and in the parable of Kena 3–4 fire cannot burn a straw and wind cannot move it, while the ranking inverts the order of the story so that the tested gods come out above the untested.
LimitsThe parable is a teaching story and the refrain is a liturgical formula; neither is an argument that could fail. Its usable half is the psychological one about projection, which is where the evidence in this vault sits.
PracticeProjection log — record what you have set up as the thing that really knows, and notice that the setting-up was yours.
After AIThe god who came nearest was the one who went to find out whose power it was. That is the posture the vault asks for towards a model: not deciding what it is, and not deciding it is nothing either.

The Mandukya's fourth is what waking, dream and sleep are made of

The fourth is not another state alongside waking, dreaming and deep sleep. It is what those three are made of, and the text can point at it only by saying what it is not.

Becausethe Mandukya's twelve sentences close six ways of knowing and six handles in the seventh before *shanta*, *shiva*, *advaita* arrive, and Nagler is explicit that the ordinal records only the order of arrival.
LimitsA claim marked only by denials cannot be failed by any observation. Metzinger's account explains the same impression as a feature of a self-model whose construction is invisible to it.
PracticeSitting practice — sit long enough to notice that the states change and something does not, and stop short of deciding what that something is.
After AIIt is the one claim in this vault that no measurement can reach, which is why it belongs on the far side of any argument that starts from evidence. A model that reports states has states of a system; nothing here reaches the question of what they are made of.

The Upanishads offer a procedure to run, not a doctrine to believe

The Upanishads describe a repeatable procedure for turning attention on the mind itself. They offer no way for anyone who has not carried it out to check the result from outside.

BecauseEaswaran frames *brahmavidya* as a science with the mind as both instrument and specimen, and admits that the strata, the fourth, and the sameness of the observer in everyone are claims about what is found rather than what is inferred.
LimitsAn instrument that is also the specimen cannot be checked against itself, which is the objection Thompson presses. What has proved portable is the psychology of attention — that concentration can be trained and that trained concentration changes what is available to observation — and not the cosmology that follows it.
PracticeSitting practice — carry out the instruction and report what happens, and do not offer the report as evidence to anyone who has not.
After AIThe vault's method is the opposite one: a number, a date and a score. This claim marks the boundary where that method stops, and the honest thing is to leave the boundary visible rather than to dress the texts in evidence they do not have.

The Upanishads warn about half-learned confidence, not ignorance

The Upanishads do not condemn ignorance. What they warn against is the confidence that comes with a little learning: the Katha describes the blind being led by the blind, and says reasoning alone will not settle the question.

BecauseKatha 2.5 has the blind led by the blind, repeated almost word for word in the Mundaka, and 2.9 says that *tarka*, reasoning, does not terminate here; both are assertions, and the psychological claim in them is the part that has since been measured elsewhere.
LimitsThe text's remedy is a teacher who has been up the path, and nothing in it is scored or scoreable. The Dunning and Kruger pattern that supplies the modern evidence has itself been contested on statistical grounds.
PracticeCalibration log — treat the arrival of confidence as the moment to check, and score the check.
After AIA middling amount of learning is what an assistant reliably produces in a hurry, and it arrives with the fluency that the text says is the danger. The remedy the vault can actually run is Tetlock's score rather than the Katha's teacher.

Whoever is doing the knowing cannot be found among things known

The one doing the knowing can never be found among the things known. Looking at something only moves it from the unknown pile to the known one, and the knower is in neither pile.

BecauseKena 1.3–1.4 and the five-fold refrain disqualify speech, mind, eye, ear and breath in turn — every channel by which anything is known, enumerated and then ruled out.
LimitsAn enumeration is only as good as its list, and the argument works by exhausting the channels the text names. Hofstadter and Seth both take the opposite route, treating the self as something a system builds out of what it can observe.
PracticeWitness practice in review — stop trying to inspect the reviewer as one more object in the review; notice instead that the inspecting is happening.
After AITetlock's answer is the direct challenge: the forecaster can be made an object after all, by a Brier score and a benchmark. Both cannot be right about the same thing, which is why this pairing is worth holding open.

All claims · Source map